JP7757166B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player by variably displaying specific identification information and deriving specific display results as a result of the variably displaying the specific identification information.

Pachinko gaming machines, typified by gaming machines, have been known to display multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative symbols) in a variable manner in response to the variable display of specific identification information (special symbols) (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Furthermore, some machines are controlled to display a normal background display during the first customer waiting period after the variable symbol display has ended, and then display a demonstration display during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period has ended (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-86392 A JP 2016-22196 A

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by performing a variable display including first identification information and second identification information when a starting condition is met,
In one rendering mode, a plurality of types of background displays including a first background display and a second background display can be switched and displayed;
When switching the background display from the first background display to the second background display, a background fade-out display can be executed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first background display , and a background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background display,
the region in which the identification information is variably displayed includes at least a first region and a second region;
when starting the variable display of the identification information, starting the variable display of the first identification information in the first area and starting the variable display of the second identification information in the second area;
a first identification information fade-out display can be performed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first identification information in the first area when variable display of the first identification information is started, and a second identification information fade-out display can be performed by gradually increasing the transparency of the second identification information in the second area when variable display of the second identification information is started,
When terminating the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down in the first area, and the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down in the second area;
a first identification information fade-in display can be performed in which the transparency of the first identification information is gradually decreased in the first area when the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down, and a second identification information fade-in display can be performed in which the transparency of the second identification information is gradually decreased in the first area when the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down,
At least one of the first identification information fade-in display and the second identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display can be executed at a common time,
a period during which the first identification information fade-in display is performed and a period during which the second identification information fade-in display is performed are common to each other;
an execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than an execution period of the first identification information fade-in display and an execution period of the second identification information fade-in display;
The background display can be displayed during a first period after the game is completed,
A demonstration display can be displayed during a second period after the first period has ended,
During the first period, a light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
before the display is switched from the background display to the demonstration display, the background display luminance data table is switched to the demonstration display luminance data table to control the light emitting means;
when the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information before the fade-out display of the first identification information and the fade-out display of the second identification information are started;
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control, thereby improving the product value.

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. This is a diagram for explaining decorative patterns and small patterns. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are figures showing the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) are figures showing the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) are figures showing the fourth presentation mode. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the second presentation mode. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the manner in which the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed. 1A is a diagram showing the decorative pattern change start action, (B) is a change stop action, and (C) is a loop action. FIG. 10A is a diagram comparing various decorative pattern actions with the duration of lamp light emission control, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of loop lamp light emission control. (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams illustrating examples of the operation of the hold display. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 26. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the second presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 28. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in FIG. 28. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as modified example 1. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 31. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative pattern appears. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). This figure shows the flow of the decorative pattern stop display following Figure 36. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of decorative pattern stop displays when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode). (A1) is a diagram showing a first background image, (A2) is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and (B) is a diagram explaining a change in background. A diagram showing the flow of background changes in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second presentation mode. This is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, (B) is the second presentation mode, and (C) is the third and fourth presentation modes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. This figure shows an example of operation when a start winning occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. A diagram showing the flow of pseudo-consecutive announcements. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, (B) is a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive number of times displayed and the pattern color, and (C) is a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number of times display color determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of reach effects. A diagram showing the flow of reach effects following Figure 50. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of the operation of each part in reach performance. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation. This is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach presentation following Figure 53. A diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach performance. (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing a second modification of the present invention. 10A to 10D are diagrams showing a third modified example of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo performance control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo performance control process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo performance control process. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are figures showing the second presentation mode, and (C1) and (C2) are figures showing the third presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 79. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, and (B) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the second and third presentation modes. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation in a low base state. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation in a high base state. 10A shows the conditions for starting and ending the demo movie display, and FIG. 10B shows the configuration of the demo movie display. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing examples of operation of each part in a demo movie. This is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demo performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of displaying a demo movie. 10A is a diagram showing a display example of the first scene (company name), FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a display example of the fourth scene (warning 1), and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing a display example of the fourth scene (warning 2). This is a diagram comparing the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small patterns. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the light emission patterns of lamps corresponding to game states. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the arrangement of lamps in a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of FIG. (A1) to (A8) are diagrams showing an example of operation when a customer waiting demo performance is performed after the variable display of the first special pattern in a low base state has ended. (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing the main parts of FIG. 94. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a low base state. (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing examples of the operation of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko gaming machine starts a cold start and then starts a customer waiting demo performance. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of when a pachinko gaming machine starts a customer waiting demo performance after being started by a cold start. This figure shows an example of operation when a pachinko gaming machine is started with a hot start in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. This is a timing chart showing the flow of when a pachinko gaming machine starts with a hot start in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance begins. This figure shows an example of operation when a pachinko game machine is started with a hot start in a high base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which a pachinko gaming machine starts with a hot start in a high base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. 10A to 10E are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends after a certain period of time in a low base state. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of ending the demo movie display over time in a low base state. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of ending the demo movie display over time in a high base state. (A) to (E) are figures showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends with a starting win in a low base state. 110A to 110G are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a high base state. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display is ended by steering in a low base state. 10 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the display of a demo movie ends with a steering wheel operation in a low base state. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of operation when a demo movie display is ended by a menu operation in a low base state. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of ending the demo movie display by menu operation in a low base state. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of ending the demo movie display by menu operation in a high base state. 10A is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device when a prize is won, and FIG. 10B is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device when a prize is won. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a bulb failure error occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a priority layer. This figure shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance that started in a low base state. This figure shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance that started in a high base state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table that constitutes a lamp data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table that configures a lamp data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table that constitutes a lamp data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table that constitutes a lamp data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table that constitutes a lamp data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lamp data table used when not playing (only the button flashes white and the button flashes red is used during play). Lamp Data Table: Background Normal Parent Table Settings. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: background normal child table. FIG. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of a background normal grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of a background normal grandchild table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the child table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for background probability change. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the background probability change child table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the background probability change grandchild table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the background probability change grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button white lighting. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button white lighting child table. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: grandchild table of the button white lighting. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button white flashing. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button white flashing child table. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of the button white flashing. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button flashing red. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button red flashing child table. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the grandchild table for the button flashing red. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a child table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of an error. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the error child table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of errors. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a common table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a common table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a common table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a common table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a common table. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing examples of character display and light emission modes in each scene. 10A is a diagram showing an example of operation in the first scene, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of operation in the third scene, and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of operation in the fourth scene. 1 is a comparison table showing character animation displays. 1A and 1B are diagrams for explaining similar colors. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a display timing list for a demo movie display. 110A to 110G are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG.

The following describes the implementation of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the ornament identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display (e.g., switching display; see FIG. 22(E) ) in which the reduced identification information is switched to another reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one piece of decorative identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decorative identification information, and during the period until the display of the one piece of decorative identification information is completed, the reduced identification information can be switched multiple times (for example, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern is completed, the small patterns are switched five times to small patterns of losing combinations, and are displayed for each period Ta1 (period Ta1<period Ta2). See FIG. 22(E)).
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is configured by a combination of the decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326");
The display result of the variable display of the reduced symbol information is configured by a combination of the reduced symbol information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326");
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination does not become the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 decides to statically display a confirmed decorative pattern of a losing combination (e.g., "326"), this part switches the display so that the small pattern of the losing combination, which is the same as the decorative pattern "326", is not displayed after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern and before statically displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"); see FIG. 22(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched before the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information is derived so that the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination.Therefore, it is not known in advance that a non-specific combination will be derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information from the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of reduced identification information, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information that has stopped in the valid display area among the plurality of decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" that have stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be enlarged from its normal size and then displayed in a manner that returns to the normal size (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a variable stop action when it temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern in a variable display based on a miss variable pattern. See Figures 36 to 38, 42, and 43).
When the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed (see Modification 3 of FIG. 57 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is also continuously performed when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed (for example, even when the performance control CPU 120 is executing a variable stop action when temporarily stopping and displaying a decorative pattern, loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d is performed. See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination of decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is temporarily enlarged to draw the player's attention to the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area, and even when a non-specific combination that is meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept on the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Furthermore, when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, decoration identification information that is not located in the valid display area is not enlarged, so the player's gaze can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area and the load on display control can be reduced. Furthermore, since the predetermined light-emission control continues even when the decoration identification information stopped in the valid display area is enlarged, the control of the light-emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the back side to the front side while increasing transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 28 to 30 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the back side of one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character images of the other decoration identification information are displayed while the number images are not displayed. After the one decoration identification information is erased, the number images of the other decoration identification information are displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 30(A) and (B), between being displayed in a frame-in state in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and being displayed out of the frame, (For example, a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") located at the back so as to overlap partially with the decorative pattern "2") may become visible through the decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 30 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the back side toward the front side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the first decorative identification information, but in this case, the character image of the other decorative identification information located behind is displayed while the number image is not displayed, and the first decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the other decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of one decorative identification information and the number image of the other decorative identification information are not displayed overlapping each other, preventing the number image of the first decorative identification information located in the front side from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a front-moving display (e.g., a scrolling display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing in transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 31 and 32 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located behind one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character image of the one decoration identification information is displayed while the number image is not displayed. After the other decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed. (For example, as shown in Figures 31(G) and (H), in the scroll display, the decorative patterns move in a curved manner from the front side to the back side. Therefore, between the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") is displayed in the frame-in display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time when the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is displayed out of the frame, the other decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") located behind the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") so as to partially overlap the one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") may become visible through the decorative pattern "3". At this time, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). Variation 1)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a front-moving display is performed in which decorative identification information is moved from the front side toward the back side while increasing its transparency and then erased, other decorative identification information located behind one decorative identification information can be seen through the one decorative identification information, but in this case, the one decorative identification information located in the front side has its character image displayed while its number image is not displayed, and the other decorative identification information is erased before the number image of the one decorative identification information is displayed, so the number image of the other decorative identification information and the number image of the one decorative identification information do not overlap and this prevents the number image of the other decorative identification information located behind from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (for example, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a rotation display in which the ornament identification information is rotated to alternately display the front and back sides of the ornament identification information (see FIGS. 33 and 34 ).
The decoration identification information is semi-transparent during the rotation display, and becomes opaque when the rotation display stops (see FIGS. 33 and 34).
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG051),
During the rotation display, the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information, which is in a semi-transparent state, is displayed, while the number image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 34 ).
During the execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotation display (for example, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in a high base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in this order based on a loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Modified example. See FIG. 44).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the decorative identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative identification information, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, so that not only the front side but also the back side of the decorative identification information can be seen through the display. In this case, the number images on the front side of the decorative identification information are displayed, but the number images on the back side are not displayed, so the number images on the front side and the number images on the back side of the decorative identification information do not overlap, preventing the number images on the front side from becoming difficult to see. In addition, since the predetermined light emission control is continued even during the rotation display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
After the reach state is reached, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a first transparency (e.g., first transparency F1) until the reach line suggestion performance is executed, and after the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a second transparency (e.g., second transparency F2) that is lower than the first transparency (see FIG. 52 ).
After the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the timing at which the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area (for example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the timing at which the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2 which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. See FIGS. 50 to 52).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and at the timing when the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes a second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area does not interfere with the reach line suggestion image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
When the reach line suggestion performance is executed, an enlarged display for enlarging the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and a separated display for separating the decorative identification information after the enlarged display are executed can be executed (see FIGS. 50 to 52 ).
The second period from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period te1 from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1; see FIG. 52 ).
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 50(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third region, and the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions is enlarged and displayed for a first period and then spaced apart for a second period longer than the first period, thereby allowing the player to recognize the decorative identification information that forms the reach state. Also, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a light emitting means,
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is reached in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state is stopped in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion effect can be executed in which a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and then erased (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion effect),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means while the reach line suggestion performance is being executed (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed. See Figures 50(F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Light-emitting means (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control is repeatedly performed to operate the decorative identification information in a predetermined operation mode over a first period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is repeatedly performed until the variable display of the special symbols is completed. See Figures 23(C), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly performed. See Figures 24(B), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the high base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed. See FIG. 44).
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4. See FIG. 24A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed to prompt the player to change the display of the decorative identification information, while in the special state in which the variable display is likely to be performed, the variable display is not excessively prompted and the player feels annoyed. Furthermore, since the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter cycle than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be suitably highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
Information relating to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as reserved memory information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updates the number of reserved memories in the start winning determination process of step S101).
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the valid display area (for example, a portion that results in a jackpot or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R),
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be enlarged from the normal size and then returned to the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, a part where a variable stop action can be executed when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern. See Figures 36 to 39).
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information is maintained at a normal size regardless of the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, in a high base state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, if a variable display based on a shortened variable pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, a variable stop action is not executed and the size is maintained and the decorative identification information is displayed as a temporary stop. See Figures 39 and 44).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, interest is enhanced by providing variations in the movement of the decorative identification information when it stops according to the number of reserved memories, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is difficult to see, the size is maintained while the decorative identification information is stopped so that its visibility is not impaired.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The period during which the background fade-out display is performed is longer than the period during which the identification information fade-out display is performed (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be scrolled until they are displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21). See FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the shorter the fade-out display is performed, the more suddenly the impression is given that the display has disappeared. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-out display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display and the execution period of the background fade-out display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-out display of the identification information and the fade-out display of the background, it is possible to prevent the start of variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to notice.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is longer than the fade-in display period B21 from when the display speed of the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R starts to slow down until the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21). See FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fade-in display basically gives the impression of appearing suddenly the shorter the period in which it is performed, so if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are performed at the same time, the fade-in display of identification information is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the end of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images),
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then the image is erased, and a background fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized; see FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, an identification information fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, an identification information fade-in display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually reduced (for example, when the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a slow speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the reduction in speed, resulting in a fade-in display).
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display and the execution period of the background fade-in display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIGS. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-in display of the identification information and the fade-in display of the background, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused about the end of the variable display of the decoration identification information.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A specific effect can be executed in which the variable display is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pseudo consecutive announcement" that determines whether or not the variable display will be resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, in other words, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner).
The decorative identification information has decorative identification information of multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) including a number image,
When the variable display is resumed in the specific performance, a number image (e.g., pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) that can identify the number of times the variable display has resumed can be displayed in multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) (see FIGS. 48 and 49).
In the specific performance, there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are the same type, resulting in a first combination where the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, and there are cases where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different in color, resulting in a second combination where the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed, and both the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are the same type,
In the specific presentation, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination (for example, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are not the same, and a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a case where the display colors of the decorative symbols temporarily displayed and the pseudo consecutive number of times are the same, and there is a higher probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in the pseudo consecutive prediction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest in the game is increased because it is possible to draw attention not only to whether or not a specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of the number image of the decorative identification information temporarily displayed and the number and color of the count image if the specific effect is executed.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The size of the reduced identification information is smaller than that of the decorative identification information, and it is possible to variably display reduced identification information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variably display of small patterns corresponding to decorative patterns),
When the variable display is not being executed, a waiting effect that displays a predetermined image can be executed (for example, a portion that can execute a "waiting-for-customer demo effect" when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the effect control CPU 120 received a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command. See FIG. 46 ).
When the standby effect is being executed, the decorative identification information is not displayed, while the reduced identification information continues to be displayed (see FIG. 46 ).
If the start condition for the variable display is met while the waiting effect is being executed, the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, and then, after the predetermined image is hidden, the decorative identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, if a start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variable display of the small symbols is started before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, then the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the effect mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first effect mode), and then the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display is started. See FIG. 47).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decorative identification information begins after the specified image is hidden, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun when the conditions for starting the variable display are met, but since the variable display of the reduced identification information begins before the specified image is hidden, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed as the active display 002SG103. The scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 26 (C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and the normal state tends to be monotonous, making it more interesting when the variable display of the decorative identification information begins. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as the active display 002SG103. The scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 26 (C) to (F)).
The variable display of the decorative identification information is executed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, upon the start of variable display of specific identification information, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows for effective use of the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not start until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, which can easily become monotonous, and the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information can be more interesting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the time required to perform the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of special symbols in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (e.g., a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs the process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 performs processing to display the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update processing of step S161).
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scrolling display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the decorative identification information, and a pre-action display (e.g., a change start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) that operates the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the moving display is not started until the switching display is completed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 is completed, and the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period has completed. Variant example).
The display of the decorative identification information is performed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of a specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to a corresponding display. Furthermore, during the switching display, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decorative identification information. This allows the time required for the switching display to be effectively utilized. Furthermore, since the moving display of the decorative identification information does not begin until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decorative identification information beginning before the corresponding display is displayed can be eliminated. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state can be made more exciting. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
In the first presentation mode, a moving display of the decoration identification information is executed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20(A1) and 20(A2)).
In the second presentation mode, a special variable display different from the moving display is executed as the variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20(B1) and (B2)).
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display period A22 when the scrolling display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scrolling display is executed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45(A) and 45(B))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second presentation mode, not only is the manner of variable display of the decorative identification information different from that in the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period from the start of variable display to the erasure of the decorative identification information is longer, so that the decorative identification information can be focused on for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to control to one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the first presentation mode to the fourth presentation mode) including the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode,
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, a fade-out display can be executed in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated after the start of scrolling display to be displayed at high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
The variable display pattern of the decoration identification information can be determined to be any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
The execution period of the fade-out display differs between a case where a predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 differ between a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. See Figures 45(A) and 45(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a predetermined variable display pattern is determined, the fade-out execution period differs between when the display is controlled in the first presentation mode and when the display is controlled in the second presentation mode, making it difficult for the player to predict that the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display start condition is met until the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed, and a post-variable display period after the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed (for example, the variable display period of a special pattern includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special pattern and small pattern starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts).
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable display period and the post-variable display period,
The related information image is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period and before the post-variable display period begins (for example, the name of the character (character related information) displayed in the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after being displayed in the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, that is, before the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins. See FIGS. 23(A) and 26).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by drawing attention to the related information image before the variable display of the decorative identification information starts, i.e., while it is statically displayed, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. Also, by erasing the related information image before the variable display starts, the player can focus attention on the variable display, preview effects, etc. rather than the related information image.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In the normal state, the display can be controlled to one of a plurality of display modes including a first display mode (e.g., the first display mode) and a second display mode (e.g., the second display mode) (e.g., the first display mode to the fourth display mode. See FIG. 20 ).
In the special state, it is possible to control to a presentation mode including a third presentation mode (for example, a third presentation mode or a fourth presentation mode),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) that is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a manner including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 26 );
In the second and third presentation modes, the decoration identification information is displayed without including the related information image (see FIGS. 28, 29, and 33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first presentation mode, the related information image is displayed to draw the player's attention to the related information image, thereby allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character, while in the second and third presentation modes, the related information image is erased, allowing the player to focus more on the variable display and preview presentation rather than the related information image.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control it into a normal state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (for example, a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The decoration identification information includes a number image (e.g., number display unit 002SG061),
When the normal background image is displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an SP reach effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot will be achieved),
In the notification performance, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect (for example, in an SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 53(F)),
As the notification effect ends, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 53(G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed).
a specific image (e.g., specific image 002SG075) is displayed in an operational state adjacent to the number image of the combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of decorative symbols for determining a jackpot that is displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 53(H) and (I)), while in the high base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is not displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of decorative symbols for determining a jackpot that is displayed after the end of the SP reach effect (see Figures 54(P) and (S))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the effect of the presentation is enhanced and made more exciting by displaying a specific image in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, but in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the specific image is not displayed in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, thereby giving a sense of speed to the variable display.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The performance control means
When the corresponding display (e.g., active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (e.g., active display area 5F) is erased based on the completion of the variable display of the specific identification information, an erasure effect display (e.g., erasure effect 002SG110) can be displayed to emphasize that the corresponding display has been erased,
If the hold display is displayed when the erase effect display is displayed, the erase effect display continues to be displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold display starts (for example, the erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. See FIG. 25 (B3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest in the presentation from declining. Also, the erasure effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, and the display of a new corresponding display allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has started.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The area in which the decorative identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left decorative pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right decorative pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle decorative pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 19 );
In the special state, the decorative identification information in the first area, the second area, and the third area is displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 19 );
The third area in the special state is disposed closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 19).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the decorative identification information in the first and second areas is made to look larger, and the decorative identification information in the third area is shifted to create a sense of depth and enhance interest, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decorative identification information is positioned near the center of the display area, thereby increasing the degree of recognition of the decorative identification information.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of Figure 1 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "002SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols, and the small symbols are displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, right-hit notification image 002SG201 (see Figure 20) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and remaining time-saving display 002SG202 (see Figure 20) that indicates the number of remaining time-saving operations may be displayed in front of (higher layer than) the effect images such as characters, thereby preventing overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while decorative symbols may be displayed behind (lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol makes it possible to determine whether or not a variably displayed symbol is currently being displayed, even if the decorative symbol is difficult to recognize, such as when the effect content, including the variably displayed decorative symbol, momentarily disappears from the screen, or when movable bodies 32A and 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Based on receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

Display areas (special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) are provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. Note that in this embodiment, a special symbol pending memory display area 5U is provided that is common to the first and second special symbols; however, a first special symbol pending memory display area that displays a first pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol pending memory display area that displays a second pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending may also be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it changes between a closed and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 for playing and outputting sound effects, etc. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

Moveable bodies 32A and 32B that operate in response to the effects are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 1). Furthermore, movable body lamps 9d are provided on movable bodies 32A and 32B. These movable body lamps 9d, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c, are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. Furthermore, these main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are constructed to include LEDs.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "miss."

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the player of the game progress or enhancing the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable bodies 32A, 32B, or by using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards on which electrical components are mounted to realize specific electrical functions.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area switch for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. In addition, each layer is classified into upper, middle, and lower levels, with images in higher layers being set with a higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers being set with a lower display priority on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 3 images. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area where an image is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5, which is an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area with a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area in which these images are drawn to display a first interface image at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first and second special pattern reserved memory counts, and a second interface image at the top left of the display area of the image display device 5, which includes a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the top-level images on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) are set to have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as the middle-level images on the image display device 5; and the images drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) are set to have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as the bottom-level images on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals that operate the movable bodies 32A, 32B to the movable bodies 32A, 32B or to the drive circuits that drive the movable bodies 32A, 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, lamp on/off (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of movable bodies 32A and 32B (such as supplying signals to operate movable bodies 32A and 32B).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 3(A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 3 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. With the variable display result specification command, as shown in Figure 3 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type will be selected if the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

For example, as shown in FIG. 3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be a "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot C." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot."

Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the decorative symbol variation in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low-probability, low-base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state). Furthermore, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high-probability, high-base state, time-saving, probability variable state). Furthermore, the time-saving probability variable state may be simply referred to as the "probability variable state."

Command A0XXH is a start-of-jackpot command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end-of-jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result designation command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (e.g., "0" to "10"), as described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 3 (A) are just examples, and some of these commands may not be included, different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to identify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the probability variable control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 4, on the main board 11, the following numerical data is controlled so that they can be counted: random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be configured to count numerical data representing some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may also count numerical data representing some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data using software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result of a special symbol or other game in a special symbol game as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot" as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special and decorative patterns, and is one of several pre-prepared types. For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "997".

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss," and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 5 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special pattern that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or special symbol state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where probability variable control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is a table referenced to determine one of several types of jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and that the jackpot game state should be controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 is assigned to several types of jackpot types, such as "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," and "variable jackpot C," depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B).

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 6 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," and "Probable jackpot C," in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "Non-probable jackpot," in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed two times (so-called 2 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, "Probable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot, and "Probable jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable jackpot.

The probability variable control and time-saving control that begin after the jackpot gaming state of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C ends are terminated on the condition that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the jackpot gaming state of a non-probability variable jackpot ends is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed or that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state before the 100 variable displays are completed. Therefore, if a recurring jackpot is one of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C, probability variable control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, in which the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without an intermediate normal state. In other words, the probability variable state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6 (A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," "Probable jackpot C," and "Non-probable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In other words, when the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." This setting allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type as a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined based on the first start condition being met to start a special game using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second start condition being met to start a special game using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in special games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never determined to be a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which results in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second start entry slot formed by the variable prize ball device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In addition, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 6 (A), the allocation of determination values for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As mentioned above, just as the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A," which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of a special game with a first special symbol may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." For example, in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, fewer judgment values may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C" compared to a special game with a first special symbol. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special game with a first special symbol or a second special symbol, the jackpot type may be determined by referencing common table data.

Figure 7 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach," respectively, and to correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot." Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that in this embodiment, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach variation patterns include a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a miss; a variation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a miss; and a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits) and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 7, the special chart change time for the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that for the super reach change pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to that determined type may be determined.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display being executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, if the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined 5% of the time, PB1-2 is determined 20% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 35% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 40% of the time.

Also, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot A to C, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined 10% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 20% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 70% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is one or less, the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss variation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined 50% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 40% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is two, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 30% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is three, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 20% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability variable state), miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and using this miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, miss fluctuation pattern determination table C determines PA1-3 80% of the time, PA2-1 10% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection rate of one of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, according to the game status, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern appropriate for the game status, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. Data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 002SG150, as shown in FIG. 9, which serves as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 002SG152, a game control timer setting unit 002SG153, a game control counter setting unit 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 002SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred, in order of winning.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151A associates the reserve number with the order of entry into the first start entry port (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 002SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, the variable display based on the second hold memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C associates game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 002SG190 as shown in Figure 10(A). The performance control data storage area 002SG190 shown in Figure 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 002SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 002SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A shown in Figure 10 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A also has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of two commands, a start win slot designation command (first start win slot designation command or second start win slot designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A have storage areas (entries) reserved for associating these start win slot designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands and storing them separately as the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the special drawing hit waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win occurs in the first start win slot, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs in the second start win slot, the CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win occurs, commands from the start win slot designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent sequentially. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win slot designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 002SG194A shown in Figure 10(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry with buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols in the first special symbol reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in Figure 10(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3." Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 11, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

Also, if the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the working area by executing the clearing process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 12. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the results of the determination, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command thus transmitted and set for the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the large prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

(Starting winning judgment process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A (002SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (002SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the number of reserved memories for the first special chart in 002SGS102 is not the upper limit value (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 002SGS101 is off (002SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 002SGS102 has reached the upper limit (002SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (002SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (002SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 002SGS105 is not the upper limit (002SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 002SGS103 or 002SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 (002SGS109). The numerical data indicating each extracted random number value and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot," and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (002SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (002SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in Figure 12 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 002SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

(Normal processing of special patterns)
Figure 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 13 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

When the number of second special symbol reserved memories is other than "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; N), the following reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to reserved number "0" are read out (step 002SGS142): random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS142, the second special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 002SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" (step 002SGS145). The number of reserved first special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 002SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol count counter and determines whether the read value is "0." In this way, the processing of step 002SGS145 is executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is determined to be "0" in step 002SGS141, and determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0." As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started before the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol; for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first or second start winning port and a start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winnings occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

When the number of reserved first special symbols stored in step 002SGS145 is other than "0" (step 002SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory unit corresponding to reserve number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS146, the first special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 002SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 002SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 5 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss." Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002SGS150). Furthermore, in this step 002SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, a "jackpot" is determined if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, which corresponds to the high probability state (high probability state), and a "miss" is determined if it does not fall within that range. Additionally, if the probability flag is off and the game is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 002SGS149, different determination values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. Therefore, in the processing of step 002SGS150, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different determination data (determination values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of a special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state. When the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is determined (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

If step 002SGS150 determines that a jackpot has occurred (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 002SGS153). By referencing the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches one of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table: "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," or "variable jackpot C" (step 002SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in step 002SGS154, the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game state ends—either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state—is determined before the fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 002SGS155). For example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0," if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, "0" if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, "2," and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, "3." After processing step 002SGS155, proceed to step 002SGS156.

Also, if step 002SGS150 determines that the result is a "miss" (step 002SGS150; N), step 002SGS156 is executed without executing steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and the determined result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "Probable Jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "Probable Jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 002SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 16. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 16 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable bodies 32A and 32B. Furthermore, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) is executed to execute a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) is executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to another background image, and a menu display process (step S80) is executed to display a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the following is selected and displayed: a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, a third background image corresponding to the third presentation mode, and a fourth background image corresponding to the fourth presentation mode. The first and second background images can be displayed when the game state is normal, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is in a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth background image can be displayed when the game state is in a high-probability, high-base state. Furthermore, the first and second background images are switched when a switching display condition is met, such as when a variable display of SP Reach Hare is executed or when one background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
17 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the hold memory display (first hold display 002SG101 or second hold display 002SG102) in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, such as a shift display (described later). After the hold display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag stored in RAM 122.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." During this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable bodies 32A and 32B, output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to an instruction (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to an instruction (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "4." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5." In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0," and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 17. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol reserve memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Furthermore, if the first variable display start command reception flag is OFF in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is OFF (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 002SGS273; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined based on the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, if the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols form a "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands corresponding to probability variable jackpot B to probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, decorative pattern combinations such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols form an even number as the stopping symbol.

Furthermore, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a non-variable jackpot, the stopping symbol may be determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (e.g., combinations of decorative symbols such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"), just as when the received variable display result designation command is one of the third to fourth variable display result designation commands, which correspond to variable jackpots B to C. In this case, by further sharing the effects during jackpot play and variable display in the variable jackpot state, the player can be drawn to whether the game state is in the variable jackpot state or the time-saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times, and further, whether the time-saving state will end after 100 variable displays or continue until 10,000 variable displays, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a decorative pattern combination in which three patterns are not aligned (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern.

To determine these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number to determine the stopping symbols, and determine the stopping symbols of the decorative symbols using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach with pseudo-consecutive wins (fluctuation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) (step 002SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is not a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach, that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a normal reach (step 002SGS278; N), proceed to step 002SGS383.

If the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command for a super reach, the display colors of the stopped patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5C that form the reach state are identified from the data indicating the stopped decorative patterns determined in step 002SGS276 and stored in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Then, using the pseudo consecutive number of times display determination table shown in Figure 49 (C), the display color of the pseudo consecutive number of times display to be displayed when the first re-variable display begins, that is, the pseudo consecutive number of times display (e.g., "x2") indicating that two variable displays, including the first variable display, will begin in the variable display, is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279). If it is determined that it is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279; Y), the pseudo consecutive win count display determination table shown in Figure 49 (C) is used to determine and store the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display to be displayed when the second re-variable display begins, that is, the pseudo consecutive win count display (e.g., "x3") indicating that three variable displays, including the first variable display, will begin in the variable display (step 002SGS280).

If step 002SGS279 determines that the variation pattern is not two pseudo consecutive wins, or if step 002SGS280 is executed, a start wait timer is set to start displaying the number of pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS281), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and the process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

In addition, the process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all of which are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 002SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative and small symbols to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative and small symbols. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

(Decorative designs and small designs)
Next, the decorative symbols and small symbols will be explained based on Figures 19 to 22. Figure 19 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbols and small symbols. Figure 20 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode. Figure 21 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, and (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, respectively. Figure 22 shows (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode, respectively, showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols. Figure 22 shows (E) the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) the fourth presentation mode, showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative symbols.

In Figure 19, the sizes of the decorative symbols (for low base state), decorative symbols (for high base state), and small symbols are displayed at the ratio when displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S.

As shown in FIG. 19, the decorative symbols (for low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display unit 002SG051 consisting of a circular number base portion when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base portion; a character display unit 002SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display unit 002SG051; an information display unit 002SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base portion when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, in this embodiment, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base portion; and a roughly rectangular base display unit 002SG054 displayed surrounding the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, and information display unit 002SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 002SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various information other than the name (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052.

In addition, the decorative symbols (for high base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 002SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG064 that is displayed surrounding the number display section 002SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts and the small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbol consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. Note that in this embodiment, the numbers on the decorative symbol and the numbers on the small symbol correspond, but not all of the numbers on both symbols necessarily correspond. For example, the numbers on the small symbol may be numbers "1" to "5," which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" on the decorative symbol, or they may be symbols or figures that are different from the numbers on the decorative symbol.

Next, we will explain the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns.

<Display time of each symbol> The decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) are almost always displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the image display device 5 is powered on, but they may be erased (not displayed), for example, when an SP reach effect (super reach effect) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo effect is executed. On the other hand, the small symbols are always displayed in front of the decorative symbols (higher layer) while the image display device 5 is powered on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative symbols are erased as described above. However, they may be erased when information with a higher display priority than the small symbols (for example, an error message) is displayed.

<Variable display mode of each symbol> In the first presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for low base state) are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the second presentation mode, decorative symbols are variably displayed by a scrolling display that moves curvedly from the back to the front across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the third presentation mode described below, decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation facing up and down, and in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols are displayed variably by scrolling in a linear fashion from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or presentation mode, the small symbols are displayed variably in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, switching between symbols "0" to "9" (updating symbols).

In a broad sense, the above-mentioned "scrolling display" and "switching display" are both included in "switching display," in which images are switched between displays. However, as described below, a "scrolling display" may refer to an image that is framed in or faded in to the display area, and then framed out or faded out from the display area, thereby updating and displaying multiple images. A distinction may also be made between a "switching display" and an image that is updated and displayed by repeatedly displaying and hiding (erasing), or by rotating, at a predetermined position in the display area, without moving, fading in, or fading out.

<Numeric display section> The decorative design (for low base state) and decorative design (for high base state) have not only numeric display sections 002SG051 and 002SG061, but also character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054, whereas the small design is composed only of a numeric display section.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed in the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and in the center decorative pattern display area 5C they are displayed in a size slightly smaller than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, creating a sense of depth. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for high base state) are displayed in the same size in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. The small patterns are displayed in the same size in each small pattern display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5, but the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is arranged slightly higher than the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and is therefore arranged slightly higher than the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. In the high base state, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged approximately horizontally in the approximate vertical center of the image display device 5. Therefore, the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the high base state is arranged closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 than the decorative pattern displayed and stopped at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the low base state (see Figure 20).

Furthermore, when the size of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as the standard, the size of the number display section 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display section of the small pattern is small. In other words, the size of the number display section increases in the order of decorative pattern (for high base state), decorative pattern (for low base state), and small pattern (size of number display section: decorative pattern (for high base state) > decorative pattern (for low base state) > small pattern). Furthermore, the overall size of each pattern is also in the same relationship as the number display section.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to appear larger, and the decorative patterns in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C are shifted to create a sense of depth and increase interest, while in the high base state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative patterns are positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby increasing the degree to which the decorative patterns can be recognized (see Figure 20).

The decorative pattern (for low base state), decorative pattern (for high base state), and numerical display portion of the small pattern are each formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created using 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) using points placed on a three-dimensional coordinate system as vertices, information reproducing the material, etc. is assigned to each surface, and the object is reproduced by illuminating it from an arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.). However, it may also be an image that can be viewed in three dimensions when displayed on a three-dimensional display device (for example, an image liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight that irradiates planar light from behind the image liquid crystal panel toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel located in front of the image liquid crystal panel at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel).

Furthermore, among the decorative symbols from "0" to "9," the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" are probability symbols corresponding to a "probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a high probability, high base state after the jackpot ends, while the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" are normal symbols (non-probability variable symbols) corresponding to a "non-probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a low probability, high base state after the jackpot ends. Note that even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, the normal symbols may result in a predetermined jackpot combination.

<Character Display> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative symbol (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the character display section 002SG052 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 performs a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display starts or stops, as described below. On the other hand, the decorative symbol (for high base state) and the small symbol do not have a character display section.

<Information Display Unit> The information display unit 002SG053 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Note that the information display unit 002SG053 may also be formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display unit 002SG053 also displays the "name," which is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, and as described below, the "name" is erased when the variable display begins. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have an information display unit.

<Base display section> The base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) has a decorative section that decorates the character displayed on the front, and is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). Furthermore, the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Note that both the base display section 002SG054 and the base display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, when the size of the base display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a standard, the size of the base display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is larger. On the other hand, no base display section is provided for the small pattern.

<Main Color> The color of the numbers displayed on the number display units 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative symbols (for low base state) and decorative symbols (for high base state) is "blue" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers, and "red" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. Furthermore, the number base units other than numbers, and base display units 002SG054 and 002SG064, etc., may be the same color as the numbers, or may be displayed in a different color than the numbers.

The characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured with their own original colors without being influenced by the main color. Furthermore, the character corresponding to the probability variation pattern is preferably an ally character, for example, when there are separate ally and enemy characters. Alternatively, it is preferable that the ally character be a central character in the story, such as the protagonist of the story or someone closely related to the protagonist.

As mentioned above, when the narrative concept of allies and enemies is applied, preview effects and SP reach effects are generally presented from the perspective of the allies, and if the SP reach effect is structured around allies fighting each other, the player will be notified that a favorable outcome for the allies (such as a jackpot) will occur if the outcome is favorable for the allies, such as the allies defeating the enemies.

Also, the main color with the highest occupancy rate across the entire area of each decorative symbol (for low base state) and decorative symbol (for high base state) may be the same color as the number. Also, while the color used for normal symbols consisting of even numbers is "blue" and the color used for special symbols consisting of odd numbers is "red," they may be different colors.

In addition, in high base states, as described below, the scrolling display is performed at high speed, so the decorative symbols (for low base states) need to be more visible and appealing than the decorative symbols (for low base states). Stop symbol announcements and announcements of when the variation will begin are often performed by incorporating effect displays into the decorative symbols. As a result, decorative symbols (for high base states) are primarily composed of the number display section 002SG061, and are characterized by a larger size ratio than decorative symbols (for low base states) which are composed of a character display section and a number display section.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the numbers in the decorative design (for the high base state) may be made more flashy in appearance, such as by having more complex movements or a more sophisticated design, than the numbers in the decorative design (for the low base state), in order to enhance the high base state.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. In this embodiment, the colors are "yellow" for regular symbols consisting of even numbers and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers, but they may be other colors. Also, numbers that are the same as decorative symbols may be the same color as the decorative symbols.

The design of the small symbols may be a reduced version of the material of the numbers in the decorative symbols in the low base state and high base state, but rather than enhancing the presentation effect through design, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the numbers in the decorative symbols (for example, flat rather than three-dimensional, and with a simple color that is not glossy, etc.) in order to improve visibility for players.

As shown in FIG. 20, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (B1) (B2)), the third presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (C1) (C2)), and the fourth presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (D1) (D2)). The first and second presentation modes are presentation modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in Figure 20 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background image 002SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 20 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is implemented by a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 21 (A1) and (A2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (e.g., decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeatedly updating the display from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby scrolling the display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, and small symbols, while the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 002SG101 and second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, small symbols, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all presentation modes, and therefore will not be described below.

As shown in Figure 20 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 002SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 20 (B2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (second scrolling display) that moves in a curved pattern from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 21 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving toward the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and are displayed frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R toward the side. The center decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back of the screen in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, moving toward the front, and then displayed frame-out.

Furthermore, when a leading decorative symbol (e.g., a "2" decorative symbol) displayed in frame passes the stop position of the decorative symbol set in the vertical center of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, a trailing decorative symbol (e.g., a "3" decorative symbol) is displayed in frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), while the leading "2" decorative symbol passes near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "3" decorative symbol are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative symbol passes the stop position, the trailing "3" decorative symbol and the "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number from "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and the display is updated repeatedly from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 20 (C1), in the third presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 002SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 20 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation pointing in the vertical direction.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 22 (C1) and (C2), the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode have a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b, which is the opposite surface of the first surface 5a, and the preceding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces forward, it is not possible to determine whether the succeeding decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol "4") is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, because the base display unit 002SG064 has low transmittance (is opaque), the decorative symbol displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative symbol).

The decorative symbols are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from first surface 5a to second surface 5b, then first surface 5a to second surface 5b, etc., the numbers increase in the order "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying numbers from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 (C2), when the first surface 5a is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the second surface 5b is displayed, the second surface 5b displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "3") displayed on the first surface 5a. Next, although not specifically shown, when the second surface 5b is rotated by approximately 90 degrees or more from a state facing the front and the first surface 5a is displayed, the first surface 5a displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern "4") displayed on the second surface 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation, and a time-saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 20 (D1), in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 20 (C2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 22 (D1) and (D2), each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and is displayed frame-out downward from the bottom edge of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol displayed frame-in (e.g., decorative symbol "3") passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "4") is displayed frame-in and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 22 (D1), while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol are not visible. However, as shown in FIG. 22 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the trailing "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby scrolling the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

In addition, in the second presentation mode, the name in the information display section 002SG053 of the decorative symbol is always hidden, even when the decorative symbol is stopped. In the third and fourth presentation modes, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without including the information display section 002SG053. In this way, in the first presentation mode, displaying the information display section 002SG053 draws attention to the character's name, allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character. Meanwhile, in the second and third presentation modes, keeping the information display section 002SG053 hidden allows players to focus more on the variable display and preview presentations rather than the character. Note that not only the name displayed in the information display section 002SG053, but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in Figure 22 (E), the decorative symbols and small symbols have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed, one decorative symbol is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and takes a passing period Ta2 before it is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge. In other words, it takes a period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display is finished. Meanwhile, during the period Ta2, the small symbols of a losing combination are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

In more detail, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (30 frames of images displayed per second), 10 frames of images will be displayed from the start of displaying one decorative pattern to the end of that display, and this period Ta2 will be approximately 0.3 seconds.

Meanwhile, the small symbols of different losing combinations (for example, "635," "175," "461," "532," "913," etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display ends, the small symbols of losing combinations are switched five times, each displayed for period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). Note that although the small symbols of each losing combination are displayed for period Ta1, this is only for a moment (approximately 0.06 seconds), making it difficult to see visually.

Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326") based on the determination that the display result of the variable display will be a losing display result, after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and before stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"), it switches the display so that the small pattern of the losing combination, "326", which is the same as the decorative pattern, is not displayed. This prevents the small pattern of the losing combination from revealing in advance that the decorative pattern of the losing combination will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are scrolled in the first, second, and fourth presentation modes, or rotated in the third presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed variably at a constant speed from the start to the end of the variable display.

(Various decorative actions)
Next, various action displays of decorative symbols will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 shows (A) a decorative symbol variation start action, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in Figures 23(A) to 23(C), the decorative symbols for the low base state move within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and rotate within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to provide a variable display. However, apart from this variable display movement, various actions (operations) can be performed to change the number display portion 002SG051 and character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative symbol.

(Change start action)
As shown in FIG. 23A , when variable display is initiated in the first and second presentation modes, a "variation start action" is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 flips its body orientation from left to right. Specifically, in the variation start action A1, the character is in a normal position facing diagonally forward to the right with both hands on their hips; in the variation start action A2, the character is in a position facing forward with both hands raised and spread; and in the variation start action A3, the character is in a position facing diagonally forward to the left with both hands on their hips. For the sake of convenience, only the states of three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are shown here; however, in reality, the character is displayed over several dozen frames within the variation start action period (A1-A3), resulting in a variation start action (movement) in which the character's body orientation changes from diagonally forward to the right (A1), to the front (A2), to the left (A3) in that order.

Next, after the character's body faces diagonally forward and left, the decorative symbol moves (rises) a predetermined distance from its stopped position in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction (A4), and then begins to move downward, thereby starting the scrolling display. These change start actions A1 to A4 are executed over a change start action period Tb1 (see Figure 24), from the start of the variable display of the special symbol until the start of the scrolling display of the decorative symbol (the downward movement of the decorative symbol).

For ease of explanation, only four frames of the change start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown here, but in reality, the change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's movements over several dozen frames during the change start action period Tb1, which is until the character's body orientation is reversed.

In this embodiment, the variation start action is exemplified as one in which the character's body orientation is reversed left and right, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation start action can be changed to other actions, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving their body. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern takes action. In other words, the variation start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern begins to scroll or rotate, and is an action that transitions during scrolling, i.e., a separate action that operates in a manner different from scrolling.

In addition, in the first presentation mode, during the variation start action period Tb1, the character name (character-related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden). In this way, the character name is easy to see when it is displayed statically, but once the scrolling display begins, the character name is hidden, drawing attention to the scrolling display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. The character's name (character-related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after it is displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period begins, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins. In this way, by erasing the name during the variable start action period Tb1, i.e., before the scrolling display begins, attention can be drawn to the variable display and preview effects rather than the name.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the variable display of special symbols and small symbols begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-variable display period may be the period from when the conditions for starting the variable display are met until the variable display of decorative symbols begins, that is, the period from when a starting winning occurs or when variable display based on reserved memory begins until the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins.

(Fluctuation stop action)
As shown in Figure 23 (B), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed), a "variable stop action" is executed in the decorative pattern, in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character changes from its normal state, with hands on hips and facing diagonally forward to the right (variation stop action B1), to an enlarged state that extends farther above the base display unit 002SG054 than the normal state (variation stop action B2), and then is reduced in size and restored to its normal state (variation stop action B3).

For ease of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop action B1, B2, and B3 are shown here, but in reality, the fluctuation stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character in motion over several dozen frames during the fluctuation stop action period Tb2, from when the character is enlarged until it is restored.

In this embodiment, an example of a variation stop action is shown in which a character is enlarged, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation stop action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving its body. Furthermore, at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern may also take action. In other words, a variation stop action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from actions that change, such as scrolling or rotating displays.

(Loop action)
As shown in Figure 23 (C), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed until it is displayed in a stopped state (pattern confirmed)), the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 in the decorative pattern repeatedly shrinks and restores, and a "loop action" is executed in which the number display unit 002SG051 repeatedly rotates horizontally around a rotation axis facing up and down.

Specifically, in loop action C1, the character places both hands on their hips and faces diagonally forward to the right, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; in loop action C2, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right; in loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in its normal state; and in loop action C4, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. In this loop action, loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are executed in order over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action returns to C1, and loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. In other words, in the loop action, loop actions C1 to C4 are executed cyclically.

For ease of explanation, only four frames of loop action C1 to C4 are shown here, but in reality, the character is displayed in a reduced size and then restored, and the numeric display unit 002SG051 rotates and restores during loop action period Tb3, during which the character and numeric display unit 002SG051 are displayed over several dozen frames, resulting in a loop action (movement).

In this embodiment, the loop action is exemplified by a form in which the character is displayed in a reduced size and the number display unit 002SG051 rotates, but the present invention is not limited to this. The loop action can be changed to other forms, such as a change in the character's hair or facial expression, or body movement. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054, which form the decorative pattern, undergoes an action. In other words, a loop action is an action that is executed from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in a stopped position until it is displayed as a stopped pattern (pattern confirmation), and is a separate action from the action that changes during scrolling.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of decorative symbols and lamp light emission control will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative symbols and periods of lamp light emission control, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of lamps.

As shown in Figure 24(A), the decorative pattern change start actions A1 to A4 (see Figure 23(A)) have an execution period, or change start action period Tb1, of approximately 1.5 seconds (change start action period Tb1 = approximately 1.5 seconds), and consist of approximately 45 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative pattern change stop actions B1 to B3 (see Figure 23(B)) have an execution period, or change stop action period Tb2, of approximately 0.8 seconds (change stop action period Tb2 = approximately 0.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 28 frames of images. Furthermore, the decorative pattern loop actions C1 to C4 (see Figure 23(C)) have a loop action period Tb3, which is one cycle, of approximately 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3 = approximately 1.8 seconds), and consist of approximately 55 frames of images.

Also, as shown in FIG. 24(B), the movable body lamps 9d provided on the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, as well as the main lamp 9a and frame lamp 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3, emit light based on loop light emission control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the gaming state is in a low base state.

This loop light emission control, for example, emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" over one cycle of loop light emission period Tb4, then returns to "white" after the loop light emission period Tb4 ends, and then emits light in the order of "white," "blue," and "yellow" again during loop light emission period Tb4, and this is repeated cyclically. In other words, with loop light emission control, light emissions of "white," "blue," and "yellow" are executed cyclically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3 < loop light emission period Tb4). By doing this, in a low base state, the loop action is repeated to encourage the player to use the variable display of decorative symbols, while in a high base state, where variable display is more easily performed than in a low base state, excessive encouragement of variable display, which could be annoying, is prevented. Furthermore, because the loop action is repeated at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, the decorative symbols can be made to stand out in an appropriate way.

In this embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified as a form in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted cyclically, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, a light emission pattern in which "white," "blue," and "yellow" are emitted in this order, followed by "yellow," "white," and "blue" in this order may be cyclically emitted, or a light emission pattern in which four or more colors are emitted in sequence may be cyclically emitted.

The various actions of the decorative symbols shown in Figure 24 (A) are executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but are not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode. Furthermore, the loop lighting control of the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in Figure 24 (B) is executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, but is not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third presentation mode or the fourth presentation mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold display will be described with reference to Fig. 25. In Fig. 25, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation of the hold display.

As shown in Figure 25 (A1), when waiting to play (number of reserved memories "0"), no reserved display is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5. The special reserved memory display area 5U consists of four display areas, with the first display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, the second display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponding to buffer number "1-4".

As shown in Figure 25 (A2), when a start win (e.g., the first start win) occurs while waiting to play, the first hold display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U. Next, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 25 (A3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc toward the active display area 5F, and when it reaches the active display area 5F, it is enlarged and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see Figure 25 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 25 (A2), when a start winning occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but when the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 25 (A4), the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, has not moved to the active display area 5F and switched to active display 002SG103. In other words, the shift display has not ended. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins before the shift display has ended, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

As a result, the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not begin until the reserved shift display period ends, during which it is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103.Then, the aforementioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the reserved shift display period ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 25 (B1), when the decorative pattern is being displayed variably and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U located at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved display 002SG101 in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

As shown in FIG. 25 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 has been erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun, as shown below. In this way, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of one variable display and the start of the next, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the presentation. Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 allows the player to recognize that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display has been erased, and the display of a new active display 002SG103 allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has begun.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the first hold display 002SG101 begins to move diagonally upward to the left (see Figure 25 (B3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic curve toward the active display area 5F, and by moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, it is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 25 (B4)).

In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally to the left (see Figure 25 (B3)) in conjunction with the movement of the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left, and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 25 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 25 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased upon completion of the variable display, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has not yet moved to the active display area 5F, as shown in Figure 25 (B3). However, at the point when the moving display of the first pending display 002SG101 begins, the variable display of the small symbol begins in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

However, although the variable display has begun, as shown in Figure 25 (B4), the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U has not yet finished moving (shifting display) to the active display area 5F. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern begins in this state, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has begun, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, until the end of the hold shift display period in which the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103, the aforementioned change start action is executed before the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the hold shift display period ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are configured in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes, so the shift display shown in FIG. 25 is executed in a common manner across the first to fourth presentation modes. However, for example, if a special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each presentation mode are provided, it may be possible to execute a shift display in a manner corresponding to each presentation mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 25, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in an operating mode (for example, a mode in which the hold display moves in a curved trajectory from the special chart hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F) that is common to multiple types of variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns, etc.), but it may also be possible to execute shift displays of multiple types of operating modes corresponding to each variation pattern and each presentation mode. It may also be possible to execute shift displays that operate in different modes depending on whether the game state is in a low base state or a high base state.

Furthermore, operating modes common to multiple types of variation patterns in shift display include those in which at least one of multiple elements, such as the display mode, display speed, and shift display period until the pending display is switched to the active display, is common.

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and then the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is moved (shifted) from the special symbol hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of hold memories is "0", when a start winning occurs, the first hold display 002SG101 (or second hold display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, and the active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the active display area 5F.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, a switching display (shift display) that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is exemplified, in which the first pending display 002SG101 moves non-linearly (e.g., in a mountain-like manner) from the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the display may move linearly to the left. Furthermore, the switching display (shift display) is not limited to sliding the pending display, but may also temporarily erase the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and begin displaying the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to Figs. 26 to 35. Fig. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first presentation mode. Fig. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 26. Fig. 28 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the second presentation mode. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 28. Fig. 30 is a diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in Fig. 28. Fig. 31 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols as Modification 1. Fig. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 31. Fig. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third presentation mode. Fig. 34 is a diagram for explaining how decorative symbols appear. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode.

Note that in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not represent images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG.

Figure 26 (A) shows the state in which, in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 26 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 26 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 23 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 26(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 26(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 26(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 26 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 26 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the upward action A4 begins, and when the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 26 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 26 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 26 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 26 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, downward movement begins, and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 26 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the image transmittance (transparency) gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 26(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 26(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 27(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 26(G) to 27(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the central decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of variable display operation in the second presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the second presentation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

Figure 28 (A) shows the state in which, in the second presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their rest positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, in the second presentation mode, the name in the decorative symbol information display section 002SG053 is always hidden, even when the decorative symbols are stopped.

Next, as shown in Figure 28 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed as a losing combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 28 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action (see Figure 23 (A)) begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 28(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 28(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 28(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 28 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 28 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the retreating action A4 begins, and when the retreating movement (action A4) to the back of the display screen ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 28 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 28 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 28 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 28 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 28 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

Furthermore, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the image transmittance (transparency) gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 28(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 28(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 29(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 28(G) to 29(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display in the second presentation mode is configured to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the back of the screen to the front. Specifically, as shown in Figures 30(A) and (B), the scrolling display is configured to cause the decorative symbols to move in a curved manner from the back to the front. Therefore, between the time a decorative symbol is displayed in frame-in mode in decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R and the time it is displayed out of frame, another decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "3") that is positioned so that it partially overlaps with one decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "2") may be visible through decorative symbol "2." At this time, the character in character display section 002SG052 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 30 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in number display section 002SG051 for decorative pattern "3" is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" located behind the first decorative pattern "2" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "3" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "2" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "3" do not overlap, preventing the decorative pattern "2" located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 30(A), from the time the decorative symbols are displayed in frame-in mode in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until they are displayed out of frame mode as shown in Figure 30(C), they move and disappear while increasing their transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative symbols are faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so they move from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency) as they fade out in accordance with the display speed. Therefore, from the time the scrolling display starts until the high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 30(A) to 30(C), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative symbols even at the back of the screen.

(Example of operation of variable display as modified example 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to Figures 31 and 32. In Modification 1, the decorative symbols are displayed scrolling in a curved manner as in the second presentation mode, but they move in the opposite direction to the second mode, that is, from the front side of the screen to the back side.

The flow in Figures 31(A) to 31(D) is similar to that in Figures 28(A) to 28(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in Figure 31 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative pattern actions A1 to A3 displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and backward action A4 begins, and when the forward movement (action A4) toward the front of the display screen ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 31 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 31 (F), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 31 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 31 (G), actions A1 to A3 of the decorative symbols displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 31 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun.

In addition, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 31(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 31(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 32(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 31(G) to 32(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a slow speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, with a fade-out display in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scrolling display of variant 1 is designed to move and disappear while increasing its transmittance (transparency) from the front to the back of the screen. Specifically, as shown in Figures 31 (G) and (H), the scrolling display is designed to cause the decorative symbols to move in a curved manner from the front to the back. Therefore, between the time a decorative symbol is framed in and displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time it is framed out, another decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "2") positioned so that it partially overlaps the decorative symbol (e.g., decorative symbol "3") may become visible through the decorative symbol "3." In this case, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of decorative symbol "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in number display portion 002SG051 is difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located behind the first decorative pattern "3" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "3". In this case, the character in the character display unit 002SG052 of the other decorative pattern "2" located behind is displayed, while the number in the number display unit 002SG051 is not displayed. The decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number for the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This means that the number "3" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "2" do not overlap and are prevented from making the decorative pattern "3" located in the foreground difficult to see.

In addition, in this variant 1, the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a frame-in manner, and then disappear as they move while increasing their transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as mentioned above, the decorative patterns are faded out in proportion to the increase in display speed, so they are moved from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency) as they fade out in accordance with the display speed. Therefore, from the start of the scrolling display until the high-speed display begins, it appears as shown in Figures 31(F) to 31(H). However, after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display begins, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative patterns even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the third presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 33 and 34.

Figure 33 (A) shows the state in which, in the third presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were rotating in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their rest positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 33 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 33 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, but because the high base state is in effect, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 23 (A)) is not performed. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 33(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 33(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 33(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 33 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 33 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate. In the high base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, the rotating display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate, the rotation display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed with the transmittance reaching nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 33(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at slow speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 33(G), before reaching high speed as shown in Figure 33(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As shown in Figure 34, the rotating display in the third presentation mode rotates the decorative symbols to repeatedly display them on the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b. The decorative symbols are semi-transparent during the rotating display and become opaque when the rotating display stops. During the rotating display, the number display section 002SG051 on the first surface 5a of the decorative symbols, which are semi-transparent, is displayed, while the number display section 002SG051 on the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 34 (A), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a slow speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transparency is the first transparency, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a can be seen, but the number "437" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the second surface 5b, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34 (B), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a medium speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transmittance is a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is such that the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b is visible, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the first surface 5a, is difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34 (C), when the decorative patterns are displayed in a semi-transparent state where they are rotated at high speed and have a third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are such that the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult to see, but is still visible, while the number "874" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse, second surface 5b is difficult to see. Furthermore, both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during the high-speed rotation display.

In this way, when the decorative pattern is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, making it possible to see not only the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) but also the back side (e.g., second surface 5b). However, since the numbers on the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) are displayed while the numbers on the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) are not, the numbers on the front and back sides of the decorative pattern do not overlap, preventing the numbers on the front side from becoming difficult to read. Furthermore, even when the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable display mode in the high base state, a loop illumination control (see Figure 24(B)) corresponding to the background pattern may be used to repeatedly illuminate the white, blue, and yellow light patterns. This simplifies the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d.

(Example of variable display operation in the fourth presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the fourth presentation mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 35 (A) shows the state in which, in the fourth presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily displayed at their respective stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 23 (A))

Next, as shown in Figure 35 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 35 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, but because the high base state is in effect, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 23 (A)) is not performed. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see Figure 35(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 35(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 35(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in Figure 35 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 35 (F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed where the transmittance reaches nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 35(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at slow speed immediately after variable display begins, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 35(G), before reaching high speed as shown in Figure 35(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during the performance control process in step S76, and can perform a common shift display when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).As a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, an example has been given in which the performance control CPU 120 does not perform an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

Furthermore, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be executed when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).Since a common shift display is executed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 42 and 43, an example is given in which, when the variable display of a special symbol begins, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, and then scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center begins when the shift display begins, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, and then scrolling of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin when the shift display is being performed.

(Example of operation of each part when a symbol stops displaying)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when a pattern stops will be explained based on Fig. 36 to Fig. 40. Fig. 36 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns following Fig. 36. Fig. 38 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 39 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "2 or less"])
First, an example of the operation of each part when a decorative symbol is displayed in a static display based on a miss variable pattern when the number of reserved memories is two or less in the first presentation mode will be explained with reference to Figures 36 and 37. Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 36 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop is approaching, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 36 (B)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 36 (C)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 36 (D)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 23 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 36 (E)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 36 (F), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 36 (F)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 36 (G)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 36 (H)), and then a variable stop action (see Figure 23 (B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 37 (I)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 37(J), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 37(K)).

Next, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 37(K)), the transparency of the decorative symbol becomes nearly 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 enlarges (see Figure 37(L)), after which a variable stop action (see Figure 23(B)) is executed to restore it to its original size (see Figure 37(M)). Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) is initiated and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special symbol ends.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 37 (M)).

(Example of the operation of the symbol stop display in the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "3"])
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 3 in the first presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 38(A) to 38(G). Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 38 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop is approaching, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which have been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 38 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 38 (C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 23 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 38 (D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 36 (E)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 23 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 38 (F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 38 (G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 23 (B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the loop action of the decorative symbol that was temporarily displayed as a static symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R ends, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 38 (G)).

(Example of the stop display of symbols in the fourth performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the variable display in the fourth presentation mode will be explained based on Figures 39(A) and 39(B). Note that the third presentation mode is almost the same as the fourth presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 39 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaching, the display speed of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, which were being displayed at high speed, simultaneously slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of each decorative pattern (see Figure 39 (B)).

The left, center, and right decorative symbols are then simultaneously displayed in a temporary stop at the stop positions of decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transparency of the decorative symbols becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in character display section 002SG052 (see Figure 23 (B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see Figure 23 (C)) after the temporary stop display is not executed either.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as static symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as static symbols, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 39 (C)).

In this way, in a low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is two or less and a variable display based on an abbreviated variable pattern is executed), the variable stop action adds variety to the movement of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped, enhancing interest. On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is three in a low base state, or when a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, and a variable display based on abbreviated variable patterns is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variable stop action is not executed, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size, allowing it to be stopped without impairing its visibility.

In this embodiment, the animation (moving image) data of the various movements of the decorative patterns can be created by combining materials for each period, such as: 1. From the start of the variable display to just before the high-speed variable display, 2. High-speed variable display, 3. Slow-speed variable display to stop of the variable display, 4. Stopped pattern. However, with regard to 2. High-speed variable display, as shown in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transmittance of the decorative patterns is high and they are almost transparent, and while it is possible to see how they are being displayed in a variable manner at high speed, it is extremely difficult to visually determine which decorative patterns have passed by (indicated by arrows in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). Therefore, even if there is high-speed variable display animation data for each type of decorative pattern (a type that corresponds to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), it would not be very meaningful and would only take up space in ROM 121, so it is preferable that common data be used for the high-speed variable display animation data regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Background change example)
Next, an example of background change operation will be described with reference to Figures 40 and 41. In Figure 40, (A1) shows the first background image, (A2) shows the first predetermined background image, and (B) shows the background change. Figure 41 shows the flow of background change in the first presentation mode.

As shown in Figure 40, in the first presentation mode, the background image can be switched between a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40 (A1)), which shows a daytime cityscape seen from afar, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40 (A2)), which shows a daytime cityscape. The background image is switched when a predetermined switching condition is met (for example, when an SP reach miss occurs). In this embodiment, the background image is switched at a predetermined timing in the variable display following an SP reach miss (for example, when the variable display starts).

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the first presentation mode switches between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, but the present invention is not limited to this. Although not specifically shown, it may be possible to selectively switch between three or more types of background images, including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. Furthermore, the fulfillment of the switching conditions is not limited to the above, and may also be fulfilled when a specific presentation other than SP Reach is executed, when a single background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time, or when a selection is made by the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be any timing during the variable display period, such as before the decorative symbols reach a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 40(B), when switching from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or from first predetermined background image 002SG081A to first background image 002SG081), a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081, which is displayed at 100% opacity, is gradually increased until it disappears, while a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is hidden at 0% opacity, is gradually decreased. In other words, a cross-fade display is executed in which the fade-out display period A1 of first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1). The fade-out display period A1 and fade-in display period B1 are, for example, approximately 6 seconds, during which approximately 210 frames of image are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 41(A), the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 increases over time, making it more difficult to see (see Figure 41(B)), while the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is displayed in a layer below the first background image 002SG081, decreases, gradually becoming more visible (see Figure 41(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases further, while the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see Figures 41(D) and (E)). Finally, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 reaches 100% and is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A reaches 0%, making it easily visible (see Figure 41(F)).

In the present embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are the same duration. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a portion of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which the transmittance always increases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded out, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded in, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance when the background image is faded out or faded in is not necessarily limited to increasing or decreasing at a constant rate. For example, the transmittance may increase or decrease slowly in a first period, and then increase or decrease rapidly in a second period.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the background image is switched and displayed in one presentation mode (for example, the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode), the present invention is not limited to this and can also be applied to a form in which the background image is switched from a first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode to a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, and to a form in which the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display period of the second background image are synchronized.

(Example of operation of each part in variable display)
Next, examples of the operation of each part in the variable display in each presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 42 to 45. Fig. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the first presentation mode. Fig. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the second presentation mode. Fig. 44 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. Fig. 45 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first presentation mode, (B) the second presentation mode, and (C) the third and fourth presentation modes.

(First presentation mode)
As shown in Figure 42, in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. In addition, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45 (A)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1, during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out, is longer than the fade-out display period A21, which is the period from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin to be displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A21).

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is faded in is longer than the fade-in display period B21, which is the period from when the display speed of the scrolling decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts to slow down until they are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B21).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 24 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second presentation mode)
Next, as shown in Figure 43, in the second performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in this order, and then a scrolling display is started. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45 (B)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A22 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from first background image 002SG081 to first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of variable display, a fade-out display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display will begin in which the transmittance (transparency) of first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases until it becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

The fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-out display, the more abrupt the impression of disappearance. Therefore, for fade-out displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns and the background change (for example, at the start of the variable display), the fade-out display of the decorative patterns is performed in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1 > fade-in display period B22). In this way, since the shorter the fade-in display, the more abrupt the impression it gives, for fade-in displays that may be performed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change (for example, when the variable display is stopped), the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, drawing attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22; see Figures 45 (A) and (B)). By doing this, not only does the scroll display of the decorative pattern differ in the second presentation mode compared to the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period A22 from the start of the scrolling display until the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see as the display speed increases is longer, allowing the decorative pattern to be noticed for a longer period of time.

In this embodiment, as the variable display of the decorative symbols in the second presentation mode, a second scroll display that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front has been exemplified as a special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display that moves in a linear manner from top to bottom in the first presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable display that differs in appearance from the first scroll display is not limited to the above-mentioned one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front, but may also be a variety of scroll displays, such as one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the front to the back, as described in Variation 1 above, or a scroll display that moves in a linear or curved manner from bottom to top.

Furthermore, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 are different when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and when the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. By doing this, the fade-out display period is the same despite the different presentation modes, making it difficult for the player to predict that the determined variation pattern is the non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-1, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is different from the fade-out display period A22 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start scrolling until they begin displaying at high speed. In other words, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and first background image 002SG081 would disappear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. Therefore, by erasing the decorative pattern first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is different from the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. In other words, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A would appear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly emit light in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on loop light emission control (see Figure 24 (B)) corresponding to the background pattern. In addition, background BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third and fourth performance modes)
Next, as shown in Figure 44, in the third and fourth presentation modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol starts, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating or scrolling all at once without any action to start the variation. Also, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 45 (C)).

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling display begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually slow down in unison and are displayed at a slower speed, and their transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second presentation modes are not performed, and the variable display ends as is, with the decorative symbols and small symbols displayed statically. After that, a symbol determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when a rotating display is performed in the third presentation mode or a scrolling display is performed in the fourth presentation mode, and the fade-out display period A22 when a scrolling display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45 (A) to (C)).

In addition, when the variable display of decorative patterns is being executed, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b emit light in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high-bass music based on light emission control corresponding to the high-bass music pattern. In addition, the high-bass music is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are exemplified as being illuminated in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high base music based on illumination control corresponding to the high base music pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the high base state, an illumination pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in order based on loop illumination control corresponding to the background pattern (see Figure 24 (B)), and background BGM may be output from speakers 8L and 8R. This simplifies the illumination control of the performance control CPU 120.

(Example of customer waiting demo performance)
Next, the customer waiting demo effect will be described with reference to Figures 46 and 47. Figure 46 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo effect. Figure 47 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a start winning occurs during the customer waiting demo effect.

As shown in Figure 46, the "waiting for customers demo effect" is an effect that notifies the player that they are in a waiting for customers (waiting to play) state, and is initiated by the effect control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the reception of the waiting for customers demo designation command output from the main board 11 without the reception of a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not specifically shown, when the power is turned on, initial operations of movable bodies 32A, 32B, etc. are performed in the initial operation control process, and then menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 46 (A)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on without any variable display, menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is no longer displayed, customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see Figure 46 (B)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after displaying moving images sequentially introducing the multiple ally characters (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various performances and the content itself (see Figures 46(B)-(E)), an image of a group of ally characters remains displayed (see Figure 46(F)), while the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises back to the origin position (see Figures 46(G)-(H)), and the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, ending the performance (see Figure 46(I)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, a menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see Figure 46(J)).

If a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed repeatedly multiple times in the standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times. The performance format of the customer waiting demo performance as a standby effect is optional and can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the customer waiting demo effect (see Figures 46 (B) to (H)), small symbols are continuously displayed in a static state in the display area 5S, while decorative symbols are hidden in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, by displaying small symbols even when decorative symbols are hidden, the player is made aware that the variable display is in a static state.

We will explain an example of what happens when a starting win occurs while this kind of customer waiting demo effect is being performed.

As shown in Figure 47 (A), if the first start winning occurs (the conditions for starting the variable display are met) while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variable display of small symbols will begin in the display area 5S while the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is displayed, as shown in Figure 47 (B).

Next, as shown in Figure 47 (C), the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and decorative symbols are displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F are also displayed, and the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Then, the first reserved display 002SG101 begins to move (shift) from the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to change in the order of left, right, and center.

As shown in Figure 47 (D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in Figure 47 (E), the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R move upward in sequence, ending the change start action and starting the scrolling display (see Figure 47 (F)).

In this way, if a start win occurs while the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, the variable display of small symbols begins before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and then the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the performance mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode), after which the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display begins.

In other words, if the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins while the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is still displayed, it will be difficult for the player to understand that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the small symbols, switching from the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starting the scrolling display after the shift display of the pending display has ended, the player can be made to recognize that the scrolling display has begun in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scrolling display begins after the shift display has ended, there will be a large time lag between the occurrence of the first start winning and the start of the scrolling display. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols will begin before the customer waiting demo effect image 002SG400 is hidden, ensuring a display that corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 46(A), (I), and (J), when the customer waiting demo performance ends and the decorative symbols are displayed frozen in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, if the first or second performance mode is selected, a loop action (see Figure 23(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is executed, and loop lighting control (see Figure 24(B)) is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. On the other hand, if the third or fourth performance mode is selected, the loop action (see Figure 23(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is not executed, and lighting control is executed for the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d in accordance with the rhythm, melody, and beat of the high-bass music.

In this way, in a low base state, the decorative symbol loop action is repeatedly executed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, drawing attention to the decorative symbol, thereby encouraging the variable display of the decorative symbol, and thus encouraging the player to resume playing. Meanwhile, in a high base state, neither the decorative symbol loop action nor the loop light emission control is executed, drawing attention to the fact that a high base effect (third or fourth effect mode) is being performed. The decorative symbol loop action does not need to be executed in the first or second effect mode, and the decorative symbol loop action may be executed in the third or fourth effect mode.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state because it is unlikely that a player will end play in the high base state, and it is more likely that they will simply leave their seat. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an inoperable state without a variable display, and appealing with the loop action prevents other players from accidentally sitting down.

In addition, the "loop action" in this embodiment focuses solely on "movement," but for example, the decorative pattern does not change position, sway, or deform, but may instead remain stationary while a highlight moves across the decorative pattern, creating a sparkling animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and effect images (not shown) such as character images displayed as background images in the high base state may be animated in time with the high base music, or by moving the background images at a predetermined speed. In this case, as described above, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state, the decorative pattern loop action is not executed, but the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 may continue.

(Example of pseudo consecutive announcement)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive win notification will be described with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a diagram showing the flow of the pseudo consecutive win notification. Figure 49 shows (A) an example of the pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, (B) a diagram showing the types of pseudo consecutive win count display and symbol color, and (C) a diagram showing a pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table.

As shown in Figure 48, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is a presentation that teases whether the decorative symbols will be temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined timing between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the display result being derived and displayed, and then the variable display will resume, in other words, whether a single variable display will be made to appear as multiple variable displays.

As shown in Figure 49 (A), the pseudo consecutive prediction can be implemented in two ways: a "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" in which the initial variable display and one re-variable display result in a total of 2 variable display times, and a "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" in which the initial variable display and two re-variable displays result in a total of 3 variable display times. If the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 1) variable display pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" is executed, and if the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 2) variable display pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" is executed. Note that the probability of winning is higher with the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" than with the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern."

Specifically, as shown in Figure 48 (A), when a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive prediction is initiated, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display was initiated. Next, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, entering a reach state (see Figure 48 (B)), and then a pseudo consecutive decorative pattern with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 48 (C)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 48(D)), and a pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" is displayed above the center decorative symbol display area 5C, indicating that the first re-variable display will begin, i.e., the second variable display will begin (see FIG. 48(F)), and variable display of decorative symbols will resume in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, center decorative symbol display area 5C, and right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 48(G)). Note that in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive symbol passes the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, and decorative symbols with a number one larger than the temporarily displayed decorative symbol are temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see FIG. 48(E)).

After the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 48 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-consecutive one-time pattern," after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as a stopped symbol (see Figure 48 (L)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed as a stopped symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as a stopped symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 48 (M)), and the performance develops into an SP reach effect.

Furthermore, after the variable display of decorative symbols resumes in Figure 48 (G), in the case of a pseudo-consecutive prediction of a "pseudo-double-consecutive pattern," a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and then a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, thereby returning to a reach state, after which a pseudo-consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before its stop position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see Figure 48 (H)).

Next, the pseudo consecutive decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 48 (I)), and the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213, which reads "x3," is displayed above the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, indicating that the second re-variable display will begin, i.e., the third variable display will begin (see Figure 48 (J)). After that, the variable display of the decorative patterns resumes in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 48 (K)).

After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 48 (L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 48 (M)), and the SP reach performance develops.

The pseudo consecutive announcement includes an introductory part that teases whether or not the variable display will resume (see Figures 48 (A)-(C), (G), (J), (K), (L)), and a result announcement part that notifies the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed (see Figures 48 (D)-(F), (H), (I), (M)).

As shown in Figure 49 (B1), during the pseudo consecutive win preview, when the variable display resumes after the pseudo consecutive win decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, a pseudo consecutive win count display is displayed that indicates the number of times the variable display has resumed. Specifically, a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 (see Figures 48 (F) (G)) of "x2" is displayed, indicating that the first variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the second variable win display will begin, and a pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 (see Figures 48 (J) (K)) of "x3" is displayed, indicating that the second variable win re-display will begin, i.e., the third variable win display will begin.

The pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 49 (B1) and the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 49 (B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes displayed in red. Also, as explained in FIG. 19, even-numbered regular symbols are displayed in blue, and odd-numbered special symbols are displayed in red. The display color of this pseudo consecutive win count display is determined using the pseudo consecutive win count display color determination table shown in FIG. 49 (C) in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 of the variable display count setting process explained in FIG. 18.

Specifically, when determining the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display 002SG212 in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, if the variable display result is a "probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color is blue and pseudo consecutive win count display color is red/symbol color is red and pseudo consecutive win count display color is blue) is determined 10% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the symbol color of the decorative symbol determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are blue/symbol color and pseudo consecutive win count display color are red) is determined 90% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "non-probable jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is blue) is determined 30% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are red) is determined 70% of the time.

Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo-consecutive number display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo-consecutive number display color is blue) is determined 90% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo-consecutive number display color are red) is determined 10% of the time.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive win prediction, there are cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a first combination of different colors, and cases where the temporarily stopped decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a second combination of the same color, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed with the second combination than when the variable display is resumed with the first combination in the pseudo consecutive win prediction.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is higher than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color red will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-identical color blue will be determined.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 49 (B1)), for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number and display color, blue, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 have the same number but a different display color, red.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the third combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, blue, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number on the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 are different, both in color and red.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss and the normal symbol ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run is lower than the probability that the non-same color, red, will be determined.

If the variable display result is a jackpot, and a probability variable symbol ("3", red) is determined as the stopping symbol in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo-consecutive spin in which pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 is "x2", the third combination ("x2", red) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, red, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number in pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are different in color, blue.

Furthermore, for the second pseudo-consecutive spin in which the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG213 shows "x3", the second combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type, is determined more frequently than the first combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number of the pseudo-consecutive spin count display 002SG212 are the same type but the display color is different, blue.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, and a normal pattern ("3", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the probability that the same color, blue, will be determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive run and the second pseudo-consecutive run will be lower than the probability that a non-identical color, red, will be determined.

In this way, the pseudo consecutive prediction can result in a first combination in which the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 are the same type, but the display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are different, or a second combination in which both the numbers and display colors of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the pseudo consecutive number display are the same type. This means that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination during the pseudo consecutive prediction. This allows players to focus not only on whether or not the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, but also, if executed, on the combination of the numbers of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary stop mode and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo consecutive wins is determined as the fluctuation pattern than when a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo consecutive win is determined. Therefore, by making it more likely that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the second pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination than when the decorative symbol provisionally stopped in the first pseudo consecutive win and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display are the same type of second combination, it is possible to draw more attention to the number of pseudo consecutive wins and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display.

Furthermore, if the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive number display during the second pseudo-consecutive match are both of the same type of second combination, the decorative symbol will become a probability variable symbol, so the probability of being controlled to a probability variable jackpot gaming state may be higher if a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo-consecutive matches is determined as the fluctuation pattern than if a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-consecutive match is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display is determined from among multiple colors depending on the number of decorative symbols temporarily displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display may be a display color that is predetermined for each pseudo-consecutive win count.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display format of the pseudo consecutive number displays 002SG212 and 002SG213 is exemplified as "x2" or "x3", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive number display can be changed to various formats as long as the number of pseudo consecutive numbers can be specified. For example, it can be displayed in various formats such as "nth consecutive number" (n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth time", "nth re-variation", etc.

In this embodiment, in the pseudo-consecutive prediction, the numbers on the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display are the same type and color in two cases: when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("2", blue) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 ("x2", blue), and when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("3", red) and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG213 (x3, red). However, other patterns are also possible, such as when the decorative symbol displayed in the temporary stop is a normal symbol ("4", green) and the pseudo-consecutive count display (x4, green). The color of the numbers on the decorative symbol, the color of the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive count display, and the number of pseudo-consecutive times can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, a decision is made as to whether or not the pseudo consecutive win count display color will be the same color as the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed, and the expectation level is higher if the same color is decided than if a different color is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the number of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number in the pseudo consecutive win count display, the pseudo consecutive win count display color may not be decided, but may be uniformly decided to be a predetermined display color (for example, white, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, entering a reach state, and then a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting a re-variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo consecutive decorative symbol can be changed in various ways. Furthermore, after a decorative symbol with a different number than the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the re-variable display may also be started by a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L or the right decorative symbol display area 5R, or a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol, being temporarily displayed in a stopped position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

The decorative symbols provisionally displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R during the pseudo consecutive prediction do not necessarily have to be the same as the final decorative symbols that are displayed when the variable display ends. For example, after a regular symbol is provisionally displayed during the first pseudo consecutive, a special symbol may be displayed during the second pseudo consecutive, i.e., a symbol different from the symbol displayed during the first pseudo consecutive. Furthermore, the number of pseudo consecutive times is not limited to two, and three or more pseudo consecutive times (re-variable display) may be possible.

(Example of reach effect operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 50 to 52. Figure 50 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect. Figure 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach effect following Figure 50. Figure 52 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the reach effect. Note that, although an example of the operation of the reach effect in the first effect mode will be described below, similar reach effects may also be executable in the second to fourth effect modes.

As shown in Figure 50(A), when a variable display based on a normal reach variable pattern or a super reach variable pattern is initiated, a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display began (see Figure 50(B)). Next, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode, and the reach effect begins (see Figure 50(C)). At this time, decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the movable body lamps 9d of movable bodies 32A and 32B are illuminated based on the loop light emission control described above (see Figure 24(B)).

Note that Figures 50(B) and (C) illustrate a form in which the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and then the right decorative symbol display area 5R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and decorative symbols may be temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R simultaneously.

As shown in Figure 50 (D), when the reach effect begins, the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R are enlarged, and the reach line suggestion image, reach line effect display 002SG250, is displayed superimposed on the decorative symbol (which is nearly transparent and invisible) currently being variably displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, thereby starting the reach line suggestion effect. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line connecting the decorative symbols temporarily displayed at the stop positions in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and is a display that suggests that the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C will be displayed stationary on the reach line.

In Figure 50 (D), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and right decorative symbol display area 5R are not just enlarged as in the variable stop action described above, but rather the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053, and base display section 002SG054 that form the decorative symbol are all enlarged at the same ratio. In this way, by enlarging the display in a manner different from when the variable display is stopped, it can be recognized that the variable display has not stopped, but has entered a reach mode.

As shown in Figure 50(D), when the reach performance begins, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed small near the stop position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, superimposed on the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and then gradually extends linearly toward the stop positions (left and right) of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R (see Figure 50(E)). After reaching the left and right edges of the display screen (see Figure 50(F)), the display changes so that the vertical dimensions expand (see Figure 50(G)), and the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases through a fade-out display (see Figure 50(H)), and is finally erased and no longer displayed (see Figure 51(I)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50 (F), in the reach line suggestion performance, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (enlarge the display), and when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off, making the periphery of the display screen darker than usual, thereby making the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out more.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 50(D), after the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative pattern begins to move to the left and the right decorative pattern begins to move to the right, i.e., in directions away from each other (see Figure 50(E)). They also rotate a predetermined angle around a rotation axis facing up and down while moving away from each other (see Figure 50(F)), and when they reach the furthest position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotational display ends and they are temporarily displayed (see Figure 50(G)).

Then, as shown in Figure 50 (H), the left and right decorative patterns that were displayed enlarged in the separated positions on the left and right are reduced in size and rotated while moving from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and are restored to their normal display positions.

Then, as shown in Figure 51 (I), when the decorative symbols are restored to the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and no longer displayed, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the center decorative symbol display area 5C gradually decrease in scroll display speed and transmittance (transparency) as they fade in (see Figures 51 (J) to (K)), until the transmittance of the decorative symbols finally becomes 0% (opaque) and they are scrolled at a slow speed (see Figure 51 (L)).

As shown in FIG. 52, when executing a reach line suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a separating display that separates the decorative symbols after executing the enlarged display.The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separating display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1), allowing the player to recognize the decorative symbols that form the reach state.

Furthermore, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative symbol is restored to its original state (td2<tf1), so the player can be made aware of the decorative symbol that forms the reach state, and when restored, it can be quickly reduced in size to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged, the left-right dimension of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which focuses attention on which decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, narrows, making it difficult to see the variable display of the decorative patterns. Therefore, by performing a moving display that separates the left and right decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns that have reached a reach state are highlighted by the enlarged display, and then attention is quickly drawn to the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Furthermore, the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been exemplified as being displayed immediately after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be displayed at the same time as the reach state is reached.

In addition, the movable body lamp 9d is shown as being turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 changes after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and the lamp may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Furthermore, instead of being turned off, the lamp may be made less bright than when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body lamp 9d built into the movable bodies 32A and 32B located above and below the image display device 5 is used as the specific light-emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The specific light-emitting means is not limited to lamps located on movable bodies that can operate as described above, as long as they are located around the image display device 5. For example, it may be multiple board-side lamps, including an attacca lamp 9c, located on the gaming board, or a main lamp 9a or frame lamp 9b located on the gaming machine frame 3. In particular, if the lamp is located near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, turning it off can make the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out.

Furthermore, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2, which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 was executed, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 has been erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, so that the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the transparency of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display) after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 almost simultaneously when it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, or the reach line effect display 002SG250 may change to the second transparency F2 after a predetermined time has elapsed after it is removed from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

(Example of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of operation of the SP reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 53 to 55. Figure 53 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect. Figure 54 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect following Figure 53. Figure 55 is a diagram showing an example of operation of each part in the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a low base state, after the Reach state described in FIG. 50(C) is reached, the Reach title display 002SG070 indicating the type of SP Reach effect is displayed, thereby announcing the Reach title, and an SP Reach effect (e.g., a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as an indication effect to notify whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot (see FIGS. 53(B) and (C)). In the SP Reach effect, a fifth background image 002SG085 depicting space corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed, which is an image different from the first background image 002SG081 and second background image 002SG082, which are normal background images. Note that the fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image with a different appearance depending on the type of SP Reach effect.

Next, from the time the battle is decided until the specified valid operation period has elapsed, an operation prompt display 002SG071 consisting of the text "PRESS!!" encouraging the operation of the push button 31B, and a button display 002SG072 imitating the push button 31B are displayed (see Figure 53 (D)).

When operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 002SG071 and button display 002SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color, the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position, the effect display 002SG073 highlighting the movable body 32B is displayed, and a specified effect sound is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state (see Figure 53 (E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, and the combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed temporarily (see Figure 53 (F)).

As shown in Figure 53 (G), as the SP reach effect ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is displayed temporarily. After that, a character 002SG074 appears holding a lit ignition device, frames in from the bottom right side of the display screen, and then runs to the left, igniting the number display portions 002SG051 of the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 53 (H)).

As shown in Figure 55(A), specific image 002SG075, which depicts a flame displayed by igniting a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 of each symbol, increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 and is displayed near the numbers on the number display section 002SG051, as shown in Figures 55(B)-(D). Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in Figure 55(D), the flame image that constitutes specific image 002SG075 is displayed in a loop with three different images (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, and specific image 002SG075C), giving the appearance of a flickering flame. Finally, specific image 002SG075 disappears, the small symbols and decorative symbols are statically displayed, and the jackpot result is derived and displayed (see Figure 53(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 53 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach presentation is displayed as the background image in the notification presentation, a miss confirmed pattern combination (e.g., "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 53 (L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 53 (M), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 disappears and the first background image 002SG081 appears, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed temporarily without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the losing result is derived and displayed (see Figure 53 (N)).

Furthermore, in the variable display of the Super Reach fluctuation pattern when controlled to a high base state, after a notification effect is produced to notify players that they have been controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 53 (E)), a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP Reach effect is displayed as the background image in the notification effect, a combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed in a provisionally stopped state (see Figure 54 (O)).

As shown in Figure 54 (P), upon completion of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the jackpot confirmation symbol combination (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 54 (Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and a result notification display 002SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 53 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image in the notification performance, a miss confirmed pattern combination (for example, "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 54 (R)).

Then, as shown in Figure 54 (S), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the winning combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed statically without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the losing display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 54 (T)).

In this way, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative symbol that is displayed after the notification effect has ended, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and creating excitement (see Figures 53 (H) and (I)). However, in a high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative symbol that is displayed after the notification effect has ended (see Figure 54 (S)), giving the variable display a sense of speed.

In this embodiment, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in close proximity to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern combination displayed after the SP reach performance ends. However, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame as described above, and images other than flames (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied.

In addition, the dynamic display of a specific image may not only refer to the flickering flame as described above, but may also include the specific image rotating around the numeric display unit 002SG051, or changing in shape or display color.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which character 002SG074 acts on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby causing specific image 002SG075 to be displayed in motion around number display unit 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image may be displayed without character 002SG074 acting on each decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 56. In Fig. 56, (A1) to (A7) are diagrams showing the second modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the variable stop action enlarges the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol may be displayed moving in the opposite direction after passing the stop position in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, and then returning to the stop position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 56 (A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while decelerating towards the stopping position, and when it reaches the stopping position and is displayed as temporarily stopped (see Figure 56 (A3)), the base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053 remain displayed as temporarily stopped at the stopping position, while the number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 continue to move downward past the stopping position.

At this time, the distance L2 traveled by the numeric display unit 002SG051 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped is greater than the distance L1 traveled by the character display unit 002SG052 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped (L1 < L2).

After that, having passed the stop position, the numeric display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 each move upward, and while character display unit 002SG052 is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A5)), character display unit 002SG052 passes the stop position again and moves upward (see FIG. 56 (A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when numeric display unit 002SG051 passes upward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped is smaller than the movement distance L2 from when numeric display unit 002SG051 passes downward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped (L3 < L2). Finally, numeric display unit 002SG051 moves downward and is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A7)).

In addition, in Figure 56 (A6), the action in which only the character display part 002SG052 passes through the stopping position and moves upward is an upward action that differs in form from the fluctuation start action A4 shown in Figure 23 (A), and therefore allows the difference from the fluctuation start action to be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stopping position, rather than being displayed as temporarily stopped at the exact moment it reaches the stopping position, at least some of the multiple seed display parts that make up the decorative pattern are displayed as if they have passed the stopping position, then moved to the opposite side and returned to the stopping position. This makes it appear as if some of the display parts have passed by with force, adding a sense of realism.

Furthermore, by temporarily stopping the first display unit (e.g., base display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053) among the multiple display units at a stop position while having the other second display units (e.g., number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052) pass through the stop position, movement can be imparted without making the stop position unclear. Furthermore, by varying the movement distances passed by one of the second display units, number display unit 002SG051, and the other, character display unit 002SG052, it is possible to display movement that matches the size and appearance of the display units.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the third modification of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, when a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed at a stop position in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols before and after the decorative symbol temporarily displayed at that stop position are not temporarily displayed, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a variable display based on a miss variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), when one of the decorative symbols (e.g., decorative symbol "3") is temporarily displayed at a stop position, some of the decorative symbols before and after it (e.g., decorative symbol "2", decorative symbol "4") may also be temporarily displayed.

When one of the decorative symbols that was being variably displayed (for example, decorative symbol "3") is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see Figures 57(A) and (B)), and a variable stop action is performed (see Figures 57(C) and (D)), it is preferable that the variable stop action is performed on the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped at the stop position, and that the variable stop action is not performed on decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in areas other than the stop position.

By doing this, when a losing combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a losing display result, is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily enlarged, thereby drawing the player's attention to the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and keeping the player's gaze on the area where the decorative symbols are displayed, even when a losing combination that would not normally make sense to the player is derived. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged, decorative symbols that are not located in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not enlarged, allowing the player's gaze to be focused on the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and also reducing the load on display control.

In addition, since loop light emission control continues even when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged (see Figures 42 and 43), control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d can be simplified. Furthermore, if multiple valid stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be executed for the decorative patterns temporarily displayed at each valid stop position.

(Other Modifications)
Furthermore, when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode and then develops into an SP reach performance, only the number display unit 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach performance is displayed (for example, the upper left or right side of the display screen) by a specific action including a first predetermined action in which the left and right decorative patterns that form the reach mode move toward the front side of the display screen and a second predetermined action in which the decorative patterns move toward the back side of the display screen, and in this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative patterns is faster in the second predetermined action than in the first predetermined action.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, the decorative pattern is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 and the information display section 002SG053. When the variable display starts, the number display section 002SG051 may be able to execute a number variable start action that is different from the scrolling display, and the information display section 002SG053 may also be able to execute an information display variable start action in conjunction with the number variable start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variable start action may end before the number variable start action ends, causing the information display section 002SG053 to be erased.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which either the first or second presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, the third presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and the fourth presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, or three or more presentation modes may be executable in a high base state.

In addition, the above embodiment illustrates a form in which a first scrolling display in the vertical direction is executed in the first presentation mode, a second scrolling display that curves and moves from the back to the front in the second presentation mode, a rotating display in the third presentation mode, and a third scrolling display in the vertical direction in the fourth presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be modified in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states may also be a time-saving state, a probability variable state, a small jackpot game state, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to execute variable display than the normal state and have a shorter average variable display period, are a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variable state (high probability high base state), and an example is given of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the probability variable state at the end of a jackpot game.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is part of the case where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game can be called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled after the end of an advantageous state or in a low-probability state after RAM clearing (a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled to an advantageous state can be called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low-probability state can be called time-saving state C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to enter the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can result in winning the time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may be varied depending on the type of variable display result that results in winning the time-saving state C.

[Example]
Further, the mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches from the background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table for the background display is switched to the luminance data table for the demonstration display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 75, 76, 95, 96, 97, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the control of the light emitting means is switched first, and then the demonstration display is started in a stepwise design, which makes it possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make people aware of the start of the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
before the display means switches the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table is switched from the normal state background display luminance data table to the demonstration display luminance data table to control the light emitting means;
Before the display means switches the display from the special status background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table for the special status background display is switched to the luminance data table for the demonstration display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 75, 76, 95, 96, 97, 99, 100, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the control of the light emitting means is switched on first, and then the display of the demonstration display is started in a stepwise design, which makes it possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make people aware of the start of the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
The luminance data initially used in the luminance data table for demonstration display is data that emits light in a color different from the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for normal status background display and the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for special status background display (Figures 137, 141, 145, 149, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the color of the last luminance data during the normal state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display, and the color of the last luminance data during the special state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display, so that when the demonstration display starts in each state, the change in color of the light-emitting means stands out, making it easy to understand that the demonstration display is starting, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
the third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided corresponding to the performance operation means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
During the first period and the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table different from the background display brightness data table and the demonstration display brightness data table (FIGS. 86, 95, 96, 99, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation. Therefore, by keeping the mode constant, it is possible to prevent this mistake, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
the third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided corresponding to the performance operation means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
during a second period after a first period after a game in the normal state has ended, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the third light-emitting means using one brightness data table different from the brightness data table for the normal state background display, the brightness data table for the special state background display, and the brightness data table for the demonstration display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the normal state ends, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (FIGS. 86, 95, 96, 99, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the state of the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation. Therefore, by keeping the state constant in both the normal state and the special state, it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in either the normal state or the special state, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
the third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided corresponding to the performance operation means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a first scene and a second scene;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means in the first scene in the second period using a first scene luminance data table corresponding to the first scene;
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means in the second scene in the second period using a second scene luminance data table corresponding to the second scene;
controlling the third light-emitting means in the first scene in the second period using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the first scene and the luminance data table for the second scene;
In the second scene in the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (FIGS. 86, 95, 96, 99, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation. Therefore, by keeping the mode constant, it is possible to prevent this mistake, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1, form 4-1, or form 5-1,
The first brightness data table is a brightness data table different from the promotion effect brightness data table used when a promotion effect is executed to encourage the operation of the performance operation means, and the brightness data constituting the first brightness data table has less change in brightness than the brightness data constituting the promotion effect brightness data table (Figures 154 to 162, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, one brightness data table is composed of brightness data that is used to make the brightness less emphasized than when the operation of the effect operation means is being prompted, thereby preventing the player from mistaking that the operation of the effect operation means is being prompted, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1, form 4-1, or form 5-1,
The first brightness data table is characterized in that it is composed of brightness data for turning off the light.
According to this feature, one brightness data table is composed of brightness data for turning off the lights, which prevents the player from mistaking that he is being prompted to operate the performance operation means, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1, form 4-1, or form 5-1,
The first light emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are provided on the game frame (see FIG. 93, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for effecting is provided in the game slot, but by managing it separately rather than using the same brightness data table as the other light-emitting means provided in the game slot, it is possible to appropriately design the device to prevent players from mistaking that they are being prompted to operate the operation means for effecting, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is the gaming machine according to form 3-1, form 4-1, or form 5-1,
The display means displays a message indicating that the device is starting up after the device is powered on,
The light emission control means
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is running;
The third light-emitting means is controlled using one brightness data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is activated (FIGS. 104, 106, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using the brightness data table to emit light before the background display is made, it is possible to check whether the light emitting means is normal at the start-up stage, and then the light emitting mode can be seamlessly changed to the mode for when customers are waiting, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, a warning display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the name of a company associated with the gaming machine is displayed in text,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The warning display scene is a scene in which text is displayed to call attention to a game played on the gaming machine,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
In the attention-calling display scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene corresponding to the attention-calling display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene, the luminance data table for the title name display scene, and the luminance data table for the warning display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (see FIG. 86, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.

The company name includes the name of the company involved in the development, manufacturing, and sales of the gaming machine.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text displays, and since it is desired to emphasize each piece of information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, by emitting dedicated light for each, it is possible to highlight them in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
There is another scene between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene.
In other scenes, a luminance data table different from the first luminance data table is used (e.g., FIG. 86).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a common brightness data table is used in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, so that suitable light emission can be achieved without increasing the capacity, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
The execution period of the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene (30 seconds) is greater than the execution period of the company name display scene (10 seconds), and the execution period of the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene (30 seconds) is greater than the execution period of the warning display scene (5 seconds).
A distinctive feature of this system is that the company name and warning text may be displayed at times other than during the demonstration display.
According to this feature, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene, which are displayed only during the demonstration display, can be highlighted for a longer period of time, thereby achieving suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which an introduction text display of the gaming machine is animated,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which an introduction character display of the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table;
the company name display scene brightness data table includes brightness data linked to animation of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine,
The one brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the character display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and brightness data linked to the animation of the character display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (FIGS. 86, 88, 89, 148 to 155, 176).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since it is particularly desired to convey information about a company name, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, it can be emphasized in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene;
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed as an animation;
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which an introduction text display of the gaming machine is animated,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which an introduction character display of the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table different from the title name display luminance data table in the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period;
The brightness data table for the title name display scene includes brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the title name of the gaming machine,
The one brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the character display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and brightness data linked to the animation of the character display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (FIGS. 86, 88, 89, 148 to 155, 176).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since it is particularly desired to convey information about the model name, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, it can be emphasized in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the name of a company associated with the gaming machine is displayed in text,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The warning display scene is a scene in which text is displayed to call attention to a game played on the gaming machine,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
In the attention-calling display scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene corresponding to the attention-calling display scene;
the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the company name display scene is emphasized more than the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene,
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the title name display scene is more emphasized than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the warning display scene (see FIG. 85, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, and since it is desired to emphasize each piece of information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, this can be done by emitting dedicated light for each piece, and by emphasizing the lighting pattern of the company name and model title display scenes compared to warning scenes, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

A gaming machine of aspect 9-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1,
The manner in which the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the company name display scene is emphasized more than the manner in which the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene, and the manner in which the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the title name display scene is emphasized more than the manner in which the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene, are any of the following: (1) a manner in which there is a lot of blinking; (2) a manner in which there are a lot of colors that light up; and (3) a large number of light-emitting means are used (e.g., Figure 85).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the company name and the model title can be emphasized, resulting in an appropriate control of customer waiting.

A gaming machine of aspect 9-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1,
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the company name display scene is characterized by being more emphasized than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the title name display scene.
This feature makes it possible to emphasize the company name more, making it easier for players to understand which company the gaming machine is associated with, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a model introduction scene,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the model introduction scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a model introduction display scene luminance data table corresponding to the model introduction display scene;
the plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the company name display scene are luminance data configured to be emitted by the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means,
The plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the model introduction scene are luminance data configured so that the first light-emitting means emits light and the second light-emitting means does not emit light (FIG. 86, FIGS. 147 to 155).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, and in the company name display scene, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are made to emit light, and in the model introduction scene, the first light-emitting means is made to emit light but the second light-emitting means is not made to emit light, thereby making it possible to relatively emphasize the company name display scene, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for a first model introduction display scene corresponding to the first model introduction display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for a second model introduction display scene corresponding to the second model introduction display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period, the second light-emitting means is controlled using one brightness data table.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text, and in the company name display scene, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are made to emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, and in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, the first light-emitting means is made to emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, but the second light-emitting means is made to emit light in a common light-emitting mode, thereby making it possible to relatively emphasize the company name display scene, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table;
When a specific effect is executed, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow brightness data table;
The rainbow luminance data table used in the second period and the rainbow luminance data table used when the specific effect is executed are common luminance data tables (see, for example, Figures 85, 88, and 89).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant, and furthermore, by using the same brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow as the brightness data table used in response to specific effects executed during play, there is no need to increase capacity, and as a result, it is possible to perform optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table during a second period after a first period after a game in the normal state has ended;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
When a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state are executed, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow luminance data table;
The rainbow luminance data table used in the second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the rainbow luminance data table used in the second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, and the rainbow luminance data table used when a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state are executed are common luminance data tables (see, e.g., Figures 85, 88, 89).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more spectacular, and furthermore, by using the same brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow as the brightness data table used for the specific effects that can be performed in the normal state and the special effects that can be performed in the special state, there is no need to increase capacity, and as a result, it is possible to perform optimal customer waiting control.

A gaming machine of aspect 12-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 12-1,
The specific effects and the special effects are characterized in that they are effects that definitively notify that the game is being controlled to an advantageous state.
According to this feature, the brightness data table used for the effect that is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state is also used for the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene,
The title name display scene is composed of a main title name display part that displays the main title name of the gaming machine in text, and a subtitle name display part that displays the subtitle name of the gaming machine in text,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means at a timing when the main title name display part is switched to the subtitle name display part, using a subtitle name display part luminance data table corresponding to the subtitle name display part;
The brightness data table for the subtitle name display part is a brightness data table for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a lighting mode linked to the animation of the character display of the subtitle name based on a plurality of brightness data (see FIG. 86, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in that order, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. Therefore, by illuminating the light-emitting means in conjunction with the display animation of the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed as an animation;
The warning display scene is a scene in which a character display for warning a player when playing the gaming machine is displayed as an animation,
the animated display of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is more emphasized than the animated display of the character display of the caution when playing the gaming machine,
The animated display of the title name of the gaming machine is more emphasized than the animated display of the text of the warnings when playing the gaming machine (see Figures 177, 178, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text, and since it is desired to emphasize each piece of information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, this can be emphasized by displaying each piece with a dedicated display animation, and by emphasizing the display animation in the company name and model title display scenes compared to the warning scenes, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene and a warning display scene,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The warning display scene is a scene in which text is displayed to call attention to a game played on the gaming machine,
The display means
In the title name display scene, the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is animated at a specified display position;
Then, the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text animation.
In the attention-calling display scene, a character display for calling attention when playing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation at a specified display position;
After that, the text display of the caution when playing the gaming machine is displayed without animation (Figure 177, Figure 178, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the title name of the game is displayed with a lingering movement to draw attention to the title, and the attention call is not displayed with a lingering movement to allow the characters to be read clearly, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes an attention-calling display scene,
The warning display scene is a scene in which text is displayed to call attention to a game played on the gaming machine,
the attention-calling display scene is composed of a first attention-calling display part that displays a text display of an attention-call for a first event, and a second attention-calling display part that displays a text display of an attention-call for a second event,
The background color of the text display in the first attention-calling display part is different from the background color of the text display in the second attention-calling display part (see, for example, FIGS. 90 and 91).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using different background colors to draw attention to different events, attention can be increased when the event changes, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a warning display scene,
the company name display scene is a scene in which the name of a company associated with the gaming machine is displayed in text,
The warning display scene is a scene in which text is displayed to call attention to a game played on the gaming machine,
The background color of the character display in the company name display scene is different from the background color of the character display in the warning display scene (see, e.g., Figures 90 and 91).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using different background colors for the company name display and the warning notice, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when the display changes, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
After the second period has ended, the background display is displayed again;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the background display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 107, 108, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched on first and then the background display starts, it is possible to prevent a bad aftertaste when the demonstration display ends, and as a result, it is possible to carry out an appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
After the second period in the normal state has ended, the normal state background display is displayed again;
After the second period in the special state has ended, the special state background display is displayed again;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
during a second period after a first period after the end of a game in the normal state has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal state background display, the luminance data table is switched from the demonstration display luminance data table to the normal state background display luminance data table to control the light emitting means;
Before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the special status background display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the special status background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 107 to 109, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the step-by-step design in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched on first and then the background display starts prevents the end of the demonstration display from leaving a bad taste in the mouth, and furthermore, the state of the lamp can be quickly notified to the player, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is met,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the variable display is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the start condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to a display corresponding to the variable display of the effect identification information, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the effect identification information, and controls the light emitting means (see Figures 110 to 115, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is met,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means
during a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the effect identification information in the normal state, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the effect identification information in the normal state, and controls the light emitting means;
If the start condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the effect identification information in the special state, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the effect identification information in the special state, and the light emitting means is controlled (see Figures 110 to 115, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, the switching of the light emitting means can quickly notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is met, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is met,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
a background display is displayed during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
displaying the background display during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information can be displayed,
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means
during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table;
during a second period after the first period after the first special identification information has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
during a second period after the first period after the second special identification information has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for demonstration display;
when the first start condition is established while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the first special identification information, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the first special identification information, and controls the light emitting means;
If the second start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, and controls the light emitting means (see Figures 110 to 115, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of which of the starting conditions is met, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, the switching of the light emitting means can quickly notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is met,
A display means is provided,
The display means
In a first period after the variable display is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable display of the effect identification information is displayed so that the transparency of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
If the start condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the effect identification information before the transparency of the effect identification information reaches the second value (see, e.g., FIGS. 82 and 111).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, it is possible to notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is met,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable display of the effect identification information is displayed so that the transparency of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
In the normal state, when the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the effect identification information in the normal state before the transmittance of the effect identification information reaches the second value;
In the special state, if the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the effect identification information in the special state before the transparency of the effect identification information reaches the second value (see, e.g., FIGS. 82, 111, 181).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in both the normal state and the special state, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, it is possible to notify that the start conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is met, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is met,
A display means is provided,
The display means
a background display is displayed during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
displaying the background display during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information can be displayed,
A variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information can be displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable display of the effect identification information is displayed so that the transparency of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
When the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, before the transparency of the effect identification information reaches the second value, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the first special identification information,
If the second start condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the second special identification information before the transparency of the effect identification information reaches the second value (see, e.g., Figures 82, 111, 181).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of which start condition is met, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, it is possible to notify that the start condition has been met and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is met,
A launch operation means;
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the variable display is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the background display, and the background display is displayed.
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table for the background display and controls the light emitting means before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the background display (FIGS. 116, 117, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, the switching of the light emitting means can quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the firing operation means, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a menu operation means;
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to a menu display, and the menu display is displayed.
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the menu is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled using a menu display luminance data table corresponding to the menu display;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the menu display and the light emitting means is controlled before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display (FIGS. 118 to 120, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, the switching of the light emitting means can quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operation means, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a menu operation means;
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to a menu display, and the menu display is displayed.
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
during a second period after a first period after the end of a game in the normal state has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
When the menu is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled using a menu display luminance data table corresponding to the menu display;
when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the menu display, and the light emitting means is controlled;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the menu display and the light emitting means is controlled before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display (FIGS. 118 to 120, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, the switching of the light emitting means can quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operation means, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature results in favorable customer waiting control.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
After the second period ends, a switching display is displayed, and then the background display is displayed;
If an interrupt condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the background display without displaying the switching display (see, for example, FIGS. 107 to 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the termination of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing to have been abruptly switched by inserting a switching display, and the termination of the demonstration display due to an interruption condition is made to appear to have been abruptly switched without inserting a switching display, so that by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the fact that the display has been terminated due to an interruption, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
After the second period in the normal state has ended, a switching display is displayed, and then the normal state background display is displayed;
After the second period in the special state has ended, display the switching indication, and then display the special state background indication;
When the demonstration display is displayed in the normal state, if an interruption condition is met, the demonstration display is switched to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

When the demonstration display is displayed in the special state, if the interrupt condition is met, the demonstration display is switched to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (see, for example, Figures 107 to 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, the termination of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing to have been abrupt by inserting a switching display in between, and the termination of the demonstration display due to an interruption condition is made to appear to have been abrupt without inserting a switching display in between, so that by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the fact that the display has been terminated due to an interruption, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
The display means
If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guide display regarding the performance adjustment at the display start timing of the background display,
Then, display the demonstration display,
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the background display starts to be displayed;
If a power outage occurs and the power is turned on with initialization,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guide display regarding performance adjustment at the display start timing of the background display,
Thereafter, displaying the demonstration display;
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the background display starts (FIGS. 101 and 102).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the startup situation before the gaming parlor opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization), and in either startup situation, gaming parlor staff can check the displays by checking the background display after powering on, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guidance display, which improves the efficiency of checking.Furthermore, when the background display is displayed when the gaming parlor opens and players are welcomed, the guidance display will be the background display, so that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing of the start of play, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, which ultimately enables suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
In the normal state, a normal state background display is displayed;
In the special state, displaying a special state background display;
In the normal state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the normal state background display is displayed without displaying a guide display regarding the performance adjustment at the display start timing of the normal state background display,
Then, display the demonstration display,
Thereafter, the normal state background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed at the display start timing of the normal state background display;
In the special state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the special status background display is displayed without displaying a guide display regarding performance adjustment at the display start timing of the special status background display,
Thereafter, displaying the demonstration display;
Thereafter, the special status background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the special status background display starts to be displayed (FIGS. 103 to 106, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the startup status before the gaming parlor opens can be considered to be either a normal state or a special state, and so that it is possible to check in the background which state the game parlor has started up in, no guidance display is displayed to avoid any interference, and if the background is displayed again after that, it is highly likely that the status has already been confirmed, so by displaying the guidance display from the timing when the background display starts to be displayed, if the background display is displayed when the gaming parlor opens and players are welcomed, it will be the background display with the guidance display displayed, so that it is possible to provide clear guidance for adjustments to the presentation from the timing when play begins, and it is possible to provide players with a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
In the normal state, after the variable display is completed,
A normal state background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to the effect adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guide display;
Then, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display is completed,
A special status background display is displayed without displaying a guide display relating to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guide display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed (see FIGS. 96 to 101, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in either the normal state or the special state, by not displaying a guide display immediately after the change has ended, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to make unnecessary adjustments to the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player may have left their seat once the demonstration display has ended, by prompting the player to make adjustments to the presentation immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is met, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is met,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
In the normal state, after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended,
A normal state background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to the effect adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guide display;
Then, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the normal state, after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended,
displaying the normal state background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended,
displaying a special status background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special status background display while displaying the guidance display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended,
displaying the special status background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special status background display while displaying the guidance display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed (see FIGS. 96 to 101, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the change of the first special identification information in either the normal state or the special state has ended, or even after the change of the second special identification information has ended, no guidance display is displayed immediately after the change has ended, thereby preventing unnecessary prompting for adjustment of the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat once the demonstration display has ended, prompting for adjustment of the presentation immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display can encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
The display means
After the variable display is completed,
a background display is displayed without displaying a guide display relating to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guide display is displayed in a specific animation so as to be superimposed on the background display;
Thereafter, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is displayed in the specific animation so as to be superimposed on the background display (see, for example, FIGS. 96 to 101).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not displaying the guide display immediately after the change has ended, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting for adjustments to the presentation, and once the demonstration display has ended, by prompting for adjustments to the presentation immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and further, even when the guide display is displayed immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, the guide display is displayed using the same animation as when the guide display is displayed after the change has ended, so it is possible to appeal to the player that the guide display has been displayed without incurring any costs, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
In the normal state, after the variable display has ended, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the variable display has ended, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed;
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on, and a second specific period has elapsed, so that the demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on, and the second specific period has elapsed, so that the demonstration display is displayed;
The first specific period is a period longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 96, 99, 104, 106, 180, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the change has finished, there is a possibility that the player has not changed and it would be annoying, so a longer time is set, and since it is not the player but the gaming store staff who are present after the power is turned on, a shorter time is set so that the gaming store staff can immediately check the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
In the normal state, after the variable display has ended, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the variable display has ended, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed;
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then power-on with initialization is performed, and a second specific period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and then power-on with initialization is performed, and then the second specific period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed;
The first specific period is a period longer than the second specific period (see, e.g., FIGS. 96, 99, 102, 180, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation has finished, there is a possibility that the player has not yet changed, which would be annoying, so a longer time is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the starting method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement parlor, by displaying the demonstration display immediately, gaming parlor staff can immediately check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, which results in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on, and a first specific period has elapsed, and then a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on, and the first specific period has elapsed, so that the demonstration display is displayed;
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then power-on with initialization is performed, and a second specific period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and then power-on with initialization is performed, and then the second specific period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed;
The first specific period is a period longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 102, 104, 106, 180, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement parlor, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, gaming parlor staff can immediately check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, which results in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
In the normal state, after the variable display has ended, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has ended, a predetermined period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed again;
In the special state, after the variable display has ended, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has ended, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period has elapsed;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when a second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has ended, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period has elapsed;
In the special state, after a power outage occurs and power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has ended, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period has elapsed;
The first specific period is a period longer than the second specific period (see, e.g., FIGS. 96, 99, 102, 180, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation has ended, there is a possibility that the player has not yet changed, which would be annoying, so a longer time is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement parlor, by displaying the demonstration display immediately, gaming parlor staff can immediately check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, and further, by making the period of time until the demonstration display is displayed again the same in all situations, whether after the fluctuation in the normal state has ended, after the fluctuation in the special state has ended, or after a cold start, the demonstration movie can be displayed stably, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table continues (FIGS. 122 to 124, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by continuing to use the lamp to notify specific errors that occur during play whether the background is being displayed or the demonstration is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of specific errors, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is finished, the light emitting means is controlled using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a first period after the game in the normal state is completed, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during a game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a second period after the first period following the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table continues (see, e.g., Figures 122 to 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by continuing to use the lamp to notify specific errors that occur during play in both normal and special states, whether the background is being displayed or a demonstration is being displayed, stable notification of specific errors can be provided, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is met, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is met,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
a background display is displayed during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
displaying the background display during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
The light emission control means
If a specific error does not occur during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a second period after the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
When the specific error occurs during the variable display of the second special identification information, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a second period after the first period following the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (see, for example, Figures 122 to 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by continuing to use the lamp to notify specific errors that occur during the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information during both the background display and the demonstration display, stable notification of specific errors can be provided, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
The brightness data constituting the brightness data table for the demonstration display and the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for the specific error have different colors that account for a large proportion (FIG. 92, FIGS. 135 to 146, FIGS. 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for demonstration display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demonstration display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that account for a large proportion (FIG. 92, FIGS. 135 to 146, FIGS. 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is finished, the light emitting means is controlled using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a first period after the game in the normal state is completed, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during a game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a second period after the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
the luminance data constituting the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that account for a large proportion of the luminance data,
The luminance data constituting the special status background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that account for a larger proportion (see, e.g., Figures 92, 135 to 146, 167 to 169).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data, and the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for special state background display are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data, so that regardless of which background display is in use, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the background display, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If a specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using luminance data for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs during the second period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the luminance data for the demonstration display;
The colors that make up the majority of the luminance data for the demonstration display and the luminance data for the specific error are different (FIG. 92, FIGS. 135 to 146, FIGS. 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demonstration display, thereby enabling appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If a specific error does not occur during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using background display luminance data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs during the first period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the background display luminance data;
The colors that make up the majority of the background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data are different (Figure 92, Figures 135 to 146, Figures 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for background display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
The light emission control means
If a specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the normal state is finished, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using normal state background display luminance data corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using special state background display luminance data corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the normal state is finished,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the normal state background display luminance data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the luminance data for the special status background display;
The normal state background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data have different colors that occupy a large proportion of the data,
The color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data for the special status background display and the luminance data for the specific error are different (Figure 92, Figures 135 to 146, Figures 167 to 169, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the main color of the luminance data for a specific error is made different from that for the normal state background display, and the main color of the luminance data for a specific error is made different from that for the luminance data for the special state background display. This makes it possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, regardless of whether the state is normal or special, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for demonstration display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player differs (Figure 92, Figures 135 to 146, Figures 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for demonstration display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light emitting state during the demonstration display, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player differs (Figure 92, Figures 135 to 146, Figures 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emitting state during background display, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is finished, the light emitting means is controlled using a normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a first period after the game in the normal state is completed, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during a game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during a second period after the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
The brightness data constituting the normal state background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different,
The luminance data constituting the special status background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player differs (Figure 92, Figures 135 to 146, Figures 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display, and by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for special state background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light emitting state during the background display regardless of which background is being displayed, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If a specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using luminance data for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs during the second period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the luminance data for the demonstration display;
The luminance data for the demonstration display and the luminance data for the specific error are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are different (FIG. 92, FIGS. 135 to 146, FIGS. 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting state during the demonstration display, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If a specific error does not occur during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using background display luminance data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs during the first period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the background display luminance data;
The light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are configured to be different depending on the background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data (Figure 92, Figures 135 to 146, Figures 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for the background display, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting state during the background display, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means
During a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state has ended;
The light emission control means
If a specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the normal state is finished, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using normal state background display luminance data corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is completed, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using special state background display luminance data corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the normal state is finished,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the normal state background display luminance data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the luminance data for the special status background display;
The normal state background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by a player are different from each other,
The light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are configured to be different depending on the brightness data for the special state background display and the brightness data for the specific error (Figure 92, Figures 135 to 146, Figures 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for normal state background display, and by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for special state background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light emitting state during background display, whether in the normal state or the special state, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
a payout unit that pays out gaming media;
a detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game medium is met, and the detection means does not detect the game medium, and unpaid game medium occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
When the specific error occurs during the second period, in either the case where more gaming media than the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing unit or the case where gaming media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing unit, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the specific error brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed gaming medium by the detection means (FIGS. 92, 121, 122, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout section, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is switched to a light emitting mode corresponding to the demonstration display at the moment the detection sensor detects the first game ball, so that the demonstration display can be made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
a payout unit that pays out gaming media;
a detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game medium is met, and the detection means does not detect the game medium, and unpaid game medium occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued,
When the specific error occurs during the first period, in either the case where more gaming media than the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing unit or the case where gaming media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing unit, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the specific error brightness data table to the background display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed gaming medium by the detection means (FIGS. 92, 121, 122, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout section, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is switched to a light emitting mode corresponding to the background display at the moment the detection sensor detects the first game ball, so that the background display can be quickly made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
a payout unit that pays out gaming media;
a detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game medium is met, and the detection means does not detect the game medium, and unpaid game medium occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If, during the second period, a condition for paying out game media is met and a period in which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, the luminance data table for demonstration display is switched to a luminance data table for specific error corresponding to the specific error, and the light emitting means is controlled;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the luminance data table for the specific error is switched to the luminance data table for the demonstration display, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 92, 121, 122, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the detection means does not detect a ball, this may be due to a specific error, but it may also be due to a delayed ball or the like, so the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not immediately switched, and when a game ball is detected, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to a light emitting mode corresponding to the demonstration display, so that the demonstration display can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58-1 is
A gaming machine that can be played,
a payout unit that pays out gaming media;
a detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
Light emitting means;
a light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game medium is met, and the detection means does not detect the game medium, and unpaid game medium occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means
In a first period after the game is completed, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If, during the first period, a condition for paying out game media is met and a period in which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, the background display brightness data table is switched to a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error, and the light emitting means is controlled;
When the specific error occurs during the first period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the luminance data table for the specific error is switched to the luminance data table for background display, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 92, 121, 122, 135 to 146, 167 to 169, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the detection means does not detect a ball, this may be due to a specific error, but it may also be due to a delayed ball, etc., so the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not immediately switched, and when a game ball is detected, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to a light emitting mode corresponding to the background display, so that the background display can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the front side of Figure 58 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "004SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 58 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls as gaming media are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided in the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols, and the small symbols are displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, right-hit notification image 004SG201 (see Figure 78) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and remaining time-saving display 004SG202 (see Figure 78) that indicates the number of remaining time-saving operations may be displayed in front of (higher layer than) the effect images such as characters, thereby preventing overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while decorative symbols may be displayed behind (lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol makes it possible to determine whether or not a variably displayed symbol is currently being displayed, even if the decorative symbol is difficult to recognize, such as when the effect content, including the variably displayed decorative symbol, momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Based on receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Based on receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

Display areas (special symbol pending memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) are provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. Note that in this embodiment, a special symbol pending memory display area 5U is provided that is common to the first and second special symbols; however, a first special symbol pending memory display area that displays a first pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol pending memory display area that displays a second pending display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending may also be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 59). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be initiated. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 58, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 59), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 58, the lower left of the gaming area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers ranging from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, with side lamps 9b provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the gaming board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates in response to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 58), and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the gaming board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the gaming board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are each composed of an LED (see Figure 93). The various lamps will be described later.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the play area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 59).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 59).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "miss."

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9, the movement of the movable body 32, or as effects using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Figure 59. In addition, various boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a payout control board 004SG030, an information terminal board, and a launch control board. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The payout control board 004SG030 is connected to a payout device 004SG031, which is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 004SG032, which is installed in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device 004SG031 pass. The payout control board 004SG030 can stop driving the payout device 004SG031 depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032.

The payout control board 004SG030 is also connected to a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls the launcher 004SG033, which is capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. Furthermore, signals indicating whether the touch ring 004SG35 is being detected and signals indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launcher 004SG033 are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area switch for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. In addition, each layer is classified into upper, middle, and lower levels, with images in higher layers being set with a higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers being set with a lower display priority on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging Layer 3 images. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area where an image is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5, which is an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area with a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area in the lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5 that draws a first interface image including a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first and second special pattern reserved memory counts, and a second interface image in the upper left part of the display screen of the image display device 5 that includes a small pattern that is smaller on the display screen than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn to execute variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background display is drawn to display the background display across the entire display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the top-level images on the image display device 5; the images drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) are set to have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as the middle-level images on the image display device 5; and the images drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background display) are set to have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as the bottom-level images on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 60(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 60(A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 60 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. With the variable display result specification command, as shown in Figure 60 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

For example, as shown in FIG. 60(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be a "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot C." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the decorative symbol fluctuations in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cold started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that a cold start refers to the process of turning on the power, initializing the data without restoring the data from before power-on, and then making the gaming machine ready to execute various processes. Command 9200H is a power-off recovery command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has hot started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that a hot start refers to the process of turning on the power, and making the gaming machine ready to execute various processes based on backed-up data. A hot start is also referred to as a power-on without initialization, since no initialization is required. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low-probability, low-base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state). Furthermore, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high-probability, high-base state, time-saving, probability variable state). The time-saving, probability variable state is sometimes simply referred to as the "probability variable state." Command 96XXH is an error designation command that specifies that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and that the error has been cleared.

Command A0XXH is a start-of-jackpot command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end-of-jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result designation command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (e.g., "0" to "10"), as described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special symbols can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory count notification command and the second pending memory count notification command may be sent in response to the start of a special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory count decreases). Command E100H is a customer waiting demo designation command that specifies the execution of a customer waiting demo (demo performance). Command F100H is a frame status display designation command that specifies the status of each input port (including the on/off status of touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 60 (A) are just examples, and some of these commands may not be included, different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the probability change control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 61 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 61, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating each of the following is controlled so as to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result. Note that random number values other than these may also be used to enhance the gaming effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be configured to count numerical data representing some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may also count numerical data representing some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data using software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result of a special symbol or other game in a special symbol game as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot" as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special and decorative patterns, and is one of several pre-prepared types. For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "997".

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss," and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 62 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special pattern that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or special symbol state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where probability variable control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 63 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine one of multiple jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and that the jackpot game state should be controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 is assigned to multiple jackpot types, such as "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," and "variable jackpot C," depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B).

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 63 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," and "Probable jackpot C," in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "Non-probable jackpot," in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed two times (so-called 2 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, "Probable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot, and "Probable jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable jackpot.

The probability variable control and time-saving control that begin after the jackpot gaming state of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C ends are terminated on the condition that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the jackpot gaming state of a non-probability variable jackpot ends is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed or that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state before the 100 variable displays are completed. Therefore, if a recurring jackpot is one of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C, probability variable control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, in which the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without an intermediate normal state. In other words, the probability variable state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 63 (A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," "Probable jackpot C," and "Non-probable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In other words, when the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." This setting allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type as a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined based on the first start condition being met to start a special game using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second start condition being met to start a special game using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in special games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never determined to be a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which results in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second start entry slot formed by the variable prize ball device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In addition, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 63 (A), the allocation of determination values for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As mentioned above, just as the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A," which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of a special game with a first special symbol may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." For example, in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, fewer judgment values may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C" compared to a special game with a first special symbol. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special game with a first special symbol or a second special symbol, the jackpot type may be determined by referencing common table data.

Figure 64 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" or "reach," respectively, and to correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot." Note that a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that in this embodiment, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach variation patterns include a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (no pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a miss; a variation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (one pseudo-consecutive hit) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a miss; and a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a super reach (two pseudo-consecutive hits) and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 64, the special chart fluctuation time for the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to that determined type may be determined.

Figure 65 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display being executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, if the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined 5% of the time, PB1-2 is determined 20% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 35% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 40% of the time.

Also, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot A to C, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and using that jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive effects) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined 10% of the time, PB1-3 is determined 20% of the time, and PB1-4 is determined 70% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is one or less, the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss variation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined 50% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 40% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is two, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 30% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories for the special variable chart is three, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this miss variation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 20% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

Furthermore, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability variable state), miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and using this miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, miss fluctuation pattern determination table C determines PA1-3 80% of the time, PA2-1 10% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection rate of one of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, according to the game status, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern appropriate for the game status, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 59 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 004SG150, as shown in FIG. 66, which serves as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 004SG150 shown in FIG. 66 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 004SG152, a game control timer setting unit 004SG153, a game control counter setting unit 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 004SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151A stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151B stores reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started but in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 004SG151A associates the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) into the first start entry port with a reserve number, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 004SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the second start winning slot, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 004SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 004SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, the variable display based on the second hold memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151C associates game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 004SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 004SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 004SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 004SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 59 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 59 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 004SG190 as shown in Figure 67(A). The performance control data storage area 004SG190 shown in Figure 67(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 004SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 004SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 004SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time reception command buffer 004SG194A shown in FIG. 67(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194. The start winning time reception command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time reception command buffer 004SG194A also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (e.g., "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of two commands, a start win slot designation command (first start win slot designation command or second start win slot designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 004SG194A have storage areas (entries) reserved for associating these start win slot designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands and storing them separately as the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the special drawing hit waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win occurs in the first start win slot, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 004SG194A. When a start win occurs in the second start win slot, the CPU 120 stores the command starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 004SG194A. When a start win occurs, commands from the start win slot designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent sequentially. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win slot designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 004SG194A shown in Figure 67(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry with buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols in the first special symbol reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in Figure 67(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3." Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations on the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 68, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored; for example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

Also, if the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and initial values are set in the working area by executing the clearing process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 69 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 69. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 69.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern, based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes a setting process to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." If the display result is a "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the large prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

(Starting winning judgment process)
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A (004SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (004SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (004SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. When the number of reserved memories for the first special chart in 004SGS102 is not the upper limit value (004SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A is off in 004SGS101 (004SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols has reached the upper limit in 004SGS102 (004SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which corresponds to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (004SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4" as the upper limit) (004SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 004SGS105 is not the upper limit (004SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "2" (004SGS106).

After executing either of processes 004SGS103 or 004SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 004SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 (004SGS109). The numerical data indicating each extracted random number value and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (004SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot," and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 004SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (004SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 69 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

Following the processing of 004SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (004SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 69 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 004SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

(Normal processing of special patterns)
Figure 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 70 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 72, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 004SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 004SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

When the number of second special symbol reserved memories is other than "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; N), the following reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit corresponding to reserved number "0" are read out (step 004SGS142): random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 004SGS142, the second special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up by one entry (step 004SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 004SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" (step 004SGS145). The number of reserved first special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 004SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol count counter and determines whether the read value is "0." In this way, the processing of step 004SGS145 is executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is determined to be "0" in step 004SGS141, and determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0." As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is started before the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol; for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first or second start winning port and a start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winnings occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

When the number of reserved first special symbols stored in step 004SGS145 is other than "0" (step 004SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory unit corresponding to reserve number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 004SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer or the like.

Following the processing of step 004SGS146, the first special symbol reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special symbol reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special symbol reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry (step 004SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 004SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

In step 004SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 62 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, will be a "jackpot" or a "miss." Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," to determine whether the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 004SGS150). Furthermore, in this step 004SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, a "jackpot" is determined if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10,000 to 12,180, which corresponds to the high probability state (high probability state), and a "miss" is determined if it does not fall within that range. Additionally, if the probability flag is off and the game is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 004SGS149, different determination values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. Therefore, in the processing of step 004SGS150, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different determination data (determination values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of a special chart game or the like begins is a high probability state. When the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is determined (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

If step 004SGS150 determines that a jackpot has occurred (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 63(A) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 004SGS153). By referencing the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches one of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table: "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," or "variable jackpot C" (step 004SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in step 004SGS154, the game state after the jackpot game state ends—either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state—is determined before the fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 004SGS155). For example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0," if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, "0" if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, "2," and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, "3." After processing step 004SGS155, proceed to step 004SGS156.

Also, if step 004SGS150 determines that the result is a "miss" (step 004SGS150; N), step 004SGS156 is executed without executing steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the ON state), and the determined result of the jackpot type if the jackpot gaming state is set. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 004SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 004SGS154 is "Probable Jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "Probable Jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Additionally, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 004SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 004SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 73. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 73 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) is executed to execute a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) is executed to update the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display, and a menu display process (step S80) is executed to display a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the following is selected and displayed: first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first presentation mode, second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second presentation mode, and third background display 004SG083 corresponding to the third presentation mode. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the game state is normal, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the game state is low-probability, high-base state, and the third background display 004SG083 can be displayed when the game state is high-probability, high-base state.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
74 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 73 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 74, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display update process (step S161) to update the hold memory display (first hold display 004SG101 or second hold display 004SG102) in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 004SG194A, such as a shift display (described later). After the hold display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed depending on the value of the effect process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "4." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5." In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0," and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Demo performance control processing)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figures 75 to 77 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in step S78 of Figure 73. In the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a demo movie display is being executed (step 004SGS501). Whether or not a demo movie display is being executed is determined by whether or not a demo movie execution flag, which indicates that a demo movie display is being executed, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie is not currently being displayed, it is determined whether or not a menu is currently being displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not a menu is currently being displayed is determined by whether or not a menu display flag indicating that a menu is currently being displayed is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that a menu is not being displayed, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS503). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on is determined by whether the touch ring on flag, which indicates that the touch ring 004SG035 is on, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not on, it is determined whether or not the device is waiting to start a demo movie (step 004SGS504). Whether or not the device is waiting to start a demo movie is determined by whether or not a demo movie start waiting flag, which indicates that the device is waiting to start a demo movie, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is not waiting to start, it is determined whether a customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether a customer waiting demo designation command has been received is determined by whether a customer waiting demo designation command reception flag, which indicates that a customer waiting demo designation command has been received, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer waiting demo designation command has been received, the demo movie start waiting timer for timing the time until the demo movie starts is set to a timer value (60000) equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (step 004SGS506), a demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), a guide display start waiting timer for timing the time until the guide display starts is set to a timer value (15000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), a guide display start waiting flag indicating that the guide display is waiting to start is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer waiting demo designation command has not been received, it is determined whether a power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether a power-on designation command reception flag, which indicates that a power-on designation command has been received, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has been received, the demo movie start wait timer is set to a timer value (30000) equivalent to approximately 60 seconds (step 004SGS508), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start wait timer is set to a timer value (15000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the guide display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has not been received, it is determined whether a power outage recovery command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether a power outage recovery command has been received is determined by whether a power outage recovery command reception flag, which indicates that a power outage recovery command has been received, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power outage recovery command has not been received, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power outage recovery command has been received, the demo movie start wait timer is set to a timer value (45000) equivalent to approximately 90 seconds (step 004SGS510), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start wait timer is set to a timer value (15000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the guide display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is waiting to start, it is determined whether termination condition E2 has been met, i.e., whether a start win has occurred (step 004SGS514). Whether termination condition E2 has been met is determined by whether the start win designation command reception flag, which indicates the reception of a start win designation command, has been set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is met, the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is not met, it is determined whether termination condition E3 is met, i.e., whether touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS515). Whether termination condition E3 is met is determined by whether the detection state of touch ring 004SG035 specified by the frame state display specification command has changed from off to on.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that termination condition E3 is met, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that termination condition E3 is not met, it is determined whether termination condition E4 is met, i.e., whether menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether termination condition E4 is met is determined by whether menu display control started in the previous menu display process of step 80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is not met, the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether or not the system is waiting for the start of information display (step 004SGS524). Whether or not the system is waiting for information display start is determined by whether or not the information display start waiting flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the system is waiting for the guidance display to begin, the system decrements the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer by 1 (step 004SGS525), and determines whether the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0, i.e., whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the guidance display start waiting timer began timing (step 004SGS526).

If it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0, the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the device is not waiting for the information display to start, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the information display start waiting timer is not 0, it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is 0, i.e., whether the specified time (60, 90, or 120 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing (step 004SGS529).

If it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the performance control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS530), the demo movie running flag is set (step 004SGS531), a timer value (27500) equivalent to approximately 55 seconds is set as the demo movie timer value for measuring the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that a demo movie display is in progress, it is determined whether any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 has been met, i.e., whether a start win has occurred, the touch ring 004SG035 has been turned on, or the menu display has begun (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the termination conditions E2 to E4 are met, the timer value of the demo movie timer is decremented by 1 (step 004SGS535), and it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, i.e., whether 55 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie timer started timing (step 004SGS536).

If it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie running flag is cleared (step 004SGS537), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS538), the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS539), a guide display is initiated (step 004SGS540), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 has been met, the demo movie running flag is cleared (step 004SGS541), the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542), the demo movie display is terminated (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether termination condition E3 has been met, i.e., whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that termination condition E3 is not met, it is determined whether termination condition E4 is met, i.e., whether menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 is not met, i.e., if termination condition E2 is met, the demo performance control process ends and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that termination condition E3 is met, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether termination condition 2 is met, i.e., whether a start win has occurred (step 004SGS546).

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that termination condition 2 is met, i.e., if the menu display has ended due to a start win, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step SGS546 that termination condition 2 is not met, it is determined whether the menu display has ended (step SGS548). Whether the menu display has ended is determined by whether the control of the menu display has ended in the previous menu display process in step S80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not ended, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has ended, the menu display in progress flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (60,000) equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15,000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the guide display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that touch ring 004SG035 is on, it is determined whether termination condition 2 is met, i.e., whether a starting win has occurred (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 is met, the demo performance control process ends and returns to the performance control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 is not met, it is determined whether termination condition 4 is met, i.e., whether menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is not met, it is determined whether touch ring 004SG035 is off (step 004SGS552). Whether touch ring 004SG035 is off is determined by whether the detection state of touch ring 004SG035 has changed from on to off in response to the frame state display specification command.

If it is determined in step 004SGS552 that the touch ring 004SG035 is off, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (60000) equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the guide display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

(Type of performance mode)
Next, the types of presentation modes will be explained based on Fig. 78. Fig. 78 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, and (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode.

As shown in Figure 78 (A1), the decorative symbols (for low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display unit 004SG051 consisting of a circular number base portion when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base portion, a character display unit 004SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display unit 004SG051, an information display unit 004SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base portion when viewed from the front and information about the character displayed on the front of the information base portion (for example, in this embodiment, the character's name), and a roughly rectangular base display unit 004SG054 displayed surrounding the number display unit 004SG051, character display unit 004SG052, and information display unit 004SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 004SG053 displays the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various information other than the name (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052.

Also, as shown in Figures 78 (B1) and (C1), the decorative symbols (for high base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9," and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG064 displayed surrounding the number display section 004SG061. The decorative symbols for the high base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts and the small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbol consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. Note that in this embodiment, the numbers on the decorative symbol and the numbers on the small symbol correspond, but not all of the numbers on both symbols necessarily correspond. For example, the numbers on the small symbol may be numbers "1" to "5," which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" on the decorative symbol, or they may be symbols or figures that are different from the numbers on the decorative symbol.

As shown in Figure 78, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see Figure 78 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see Figure 78 (B1) (B2)), and the third presentation mode (see Figure 78 (C1) (C2)). The first presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The second presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in Figure 78 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first background display 004SG081, which depicts a daytime cityscape, is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 78 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is implemented using a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, then moves linearly downward and frame-out downward from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R. Furthermore, when a leading decorative symbol (e.g., a "3" decorative symbol) displayed frame-in passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, the following decorative symbol (e.g., a "4" decorative symbol) is displayed frame-in and moves downward. In other words, while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and then repeatedly updating and displaying "0" through "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" through "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, and small symbols, while the special symbol pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 004SG101 and second pending display 004SG102 corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 004SG103 corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that the first pending memory count, second pending memory count, small symbols, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all presentation modes, so explanations thereof will be omitted below.

As shown in Figure 78 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background display 004SG082 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 78 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation facing up and down.

For example, the decorative symbols in the second presentation mode have a first surface and a second surface opposite the first surface, with the preceding decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol "3") displayed on the first surface. On the other hand, when the first surface is facing forward, it is not possible to determine whether the subsequent decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol "4") is displayed on the second surface. In other words, because the base display unit 004SG064 has low transmittance (is opaque), the decorative symbol displayed on the second surface cannot be seen through from the front (cannot be seen from the front through the decorative symbol).

The decorative symbols can also be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from the first side, to the second side, to the first side, to the second side, etc., the numbers increase in the order "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying numbers from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation, and a time-saving remaining display 004SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 78 (C1), in the third presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background display 004SG083 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 78 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is implemented using a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, then moves linearly downward and frame-out downward from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R. Furthermore, when a leading decorative symbol (e.g., a "3" decorative symbol) displayed frame-in passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, the following decorative symbol (e.g., a "4" decorative symbol) is displayed frame-in and moves downward. In other words, while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

Furthermore, the decorative symbols and small symbols have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed, one decorative symbol is displayed frame-in from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and takes a predetermined period of time before it is displayed frame-out from the bottom edge. In other words, it takes a predetermined period of time for one decorative symbol to be displayed and for the decorative symbol display to cease. On the other hand, during the predetermined period, small symbols of losing combinations are displayed by switching (updating) them multiple times (for example, five times).

In addition, when the decorative symbols are displayed in scrolling mode in the first and third presentation modes, or in rotation mode in the second presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed variably at a constant speed from the start to the end of the variable display.

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the presentation control CPU 120 can execute the first, second, and third presentation modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more presentation modes may be executable. In particular, multiple presentation modes may be executable in response to a single game state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state).

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to Figs. 79 to 82. Fig. 79 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first presentation mode. Fig. 80 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 79. Fig. 81 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third presentation mode. Fig. 82 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first presentation mode and (B) the second and third presentation modes.

Note that in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not represent images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols starts in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 79 and 80.

Figure 79 (A) shows the state in which, in the first presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 004SG101 (first reserved memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 79 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the decorative symbol change start action begins in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, right decorative symbol display area 5R, and middle decorative symbol display area, in that order. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 004SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see Figure 79(D)). Furthermore, the first hold display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 79(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 79(D)).

Note that the erase effect 004SG110 displayed in Figure 79 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 79 (E), when the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the action of the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (the character's inversion movement) ends and an upward action begins, and when the upward movement ends, downward movement begins and a scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 79 (F).

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (F), the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (character flipping movement) ends and an upward action begins, and when the upward movement ends, downward movement begins and scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 79 (G).

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (G), the action of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (the character's flipping movement) ends and an upward action begins, and when the upward movement ends, downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 79 (H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins and the variable display of the small pattern begins, the variable display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a static state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R and middle decorative pattern display area begins, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scrolling display begins once the first pending display 004SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display ends) and is displayed as active display 004SG103, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on the pending display has begun. Furthermore, from the time the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a variable start action is performed in which the characters flip, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun. Furthermore, the operating mode of the variable start action can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to high speed, and the image transmittance (transparency) gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. At high speeds, a fade-out display is executed, with the transmittance reaching approximately 90%. For example, as shown in Figures 79(F) and (G), the decorative pattern in left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed at low speed immediately after the start of variable display, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 79(H), and then at high speed as shown in Figures 80(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, making it extremely difficult to visually discern each decorative pattern at high speeds. Additionally, as shown in Figures 79 (G) to 80 (K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after variable display begins, then at a medium speed, and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns starts in the third presentation mode will be described with reference to Figure 81.

Figure 81 (A) shows the state in which, in the third presentation mode, the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at their respective stop positions. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being displayed. Additionally, the active display area 5F displays the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 004SG101 (first reserved memory count "2"). Additionally, the small symbols and right-hit notification image 004SG201 are displayed superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 81 (A))

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 81 (C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the variable display of the small symbols begins, but because the high base state is in effect, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 81 (A)) is not performed. In addition, a shift display begins in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 004SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see Figure 81(C)). Furthermore, the first hold display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left begins to move horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 81(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see Figure 81(D)).

Note that the erase effect 004SG110 displayed in Figure 81 (B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in Figure 81 (C), when the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins (see Figure 81 (D)). In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left begins, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a static state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not begin until the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, once the first pending display 004SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display has ended) and is displayed as active display 004SG103, scrolling display begins, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on that pending display has begun.

In addition, when scrolling display of the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, until at high speeds a fade-out display is executed with a transmittance of approximately 90%. For example, as shown in Figures 81(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at slow speed immediately after variable display begins, then at medium speed as shown in Figure 81(G), and then at high speed as shown in Figure 81(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the decorative pattern is set to a first value (0%) when the decorative pattern is statically displayed, gradually increases as variable display begins, and finally reaches a second value (90%) during high-speed scrolling. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the first value is the minimum transparency value at which the decorative pattern is clearly visible. For example, if the decorative pattern is most clearly displayed at a transparency of 5%, the first value may be set to 5% instead of 0%. The second value is the maximum transparency value at which the decorative pattern is almost indistinguishable. For example, if the decorative pattern is almost invisible at a transparency of 100%, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. In other words, the first and second values can be changed in various ways.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display is completed, which switches the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 during the performance control process in step S76, and can perform a common shift display when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).As a common shift display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, an example has been given in which the performance control CPU 120 does not perform an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when a pending shift display is being displayed in response to the start of variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched and displayed as active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to that variable display to an active display, and by performing a variable start action to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is in progress, the period required for the shift display can be used effectively. Furthermore, because the variable start action is performed when the shift display is in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state can be made more exciting.

Furthermore, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be executed when variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command).Since a common shift display is executed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which, upon the start of the variable display of a special symbol, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, and then the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center begins upon the start of the variable display of a special symbol, a shift display that switches the pending display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, then the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is being performed.

(Operation of each part when variable display starts)
As shown in Figure 82 (A), in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, as the variable display of the special symbol starts, the small symbol is displayed variably at high speed, and after a variable start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the center decorative symbol display area 5C, a scrolling display is started. In addition, a shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins.

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period is the same for each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily displayed in that order. Furthermore, during the temporary display, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small pattern is displayed as a static display, the decorative pattern loop action ends and the pattern is displayed as a static display. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can begin.

Next, as shown in Figure 82 (B), when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed in the second and third presentation modes, as the variable display of the special symbol begins, the small symbols are displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all begin to rotate or scroll simultaneously without any action to start the change. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and once this shift display has ended, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins.

In addition, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate after scrolling display begins, becoming faster, and as the speed increases, the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative patterns to fade out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually slow down in unison and are displayed at a slower speed, and their transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

After that, the decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second presentation modes are not performed, and the variable display ends as is, with the decorative symbols and small symbols displayed statically. After that, a symbol determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when a scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when a rotating display is performed in the second presentation mode or a scrolling display is performed in the third presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21. See Figures 82 (A) and (B)).

In the first presentation mode, the appearance shown in Figure 82 (A) will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is initiated. In the second and third presentation modes, the appearance shown in Figure 82 (B) will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is initiated.

(Example of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP reach effect will be explained based on Figures 83 and 84. Figure 83 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect in a low base state. Figure 84 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effect in a high base state. Note that Figure 84 explains an example of the operation of the reach effect in the third presentation mode, but it is also possible to make it possible to execute a similar reach effect in the second presentation mode, or to execute a different reach effect.

As shown in Figure 83 (A), when a variable display based on a super reach variable pattern is initiated in a low base state, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the variable display result, whether to execute a step-up effect in which multiple characters appear in stages, and whether to display a specific step-up effect display pattern (see Figure 83 (B)) in which the background display becomes a rainbow pattern indicating a confirmed jackpot at a predetermined step in the step-up effect. If it is decided to execute a step-up effect and display a specific step-up effect display pattern, the step-up effect will begin when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, and the specific step-up effect display pattern will be displayed at the predetermined step (see Figure 83 (B)). Note that if it is decided not to execute a step-up effect, or if it is decided to execute a step-up effect but not to display a specific step-up effect display pattern, a step-up effect display pattern without a rainbow background will be displayed.

Next, after a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode, and the reach effect begins (see Figure 83 (C)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode changes to the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed, thereby announcing the reach title, and an SP reach effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as an indication effect to notify whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 83 (D)). In the SP reach effect, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is an image different from the first background display 004SG081, which is the normal background display, and depicts space corresponding to the SP reach effect (see Figures 83 (E) and (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with a different mode depending on the type of SP reach effect.

Next, from the time the battle is decided until the specified valid operation period has elapsed, an operation prompt display 004SG071 consisting of the text "PRESS!!" encouraging the operation of the push button 31B, and a button display 004SG072 imitating the push button 31B are displayed, starting with the display of the button (see Figure 83 (G)).

When operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 004SG071 and button display 004SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color while the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, the effect display 004SG073 highlighting the movable body 32 is displayed, and a specified performance sound effect is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state (see Figure 83 (H)).

Next, a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, while the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background display, a combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed (see Figure 83 (I)). As the SP reach effect ends, the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed. While the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed, and then the small symbols and decorative symbols are displayed as still symbols, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 83 (J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the presentation position, and a result notification display 004SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed (see Figure 83 (K)). After that, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach presentation is displayed as the background display in the notification presentation, a missing confirmed pattern combination (e.g., "232") that is not a jackpot combination is displayed temporarily (see Figure 83 (L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 83 (M), as the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fourth background display 004SG084 disappears and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed. While the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirms the loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed, after which the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed statically, and the loss display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 83 (M)).

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (A), when a variable display based on a super reach variation pattern is initiated in a high base state, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the variable display result, whether or not to display a specific cut-in effect display pattern (see Figure 84 (D)) in which a specific character appears and the background display changes to a rainbow pattern to indicate a confirmed jackpot, and stores the determination result.

Then, after a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode, and the reach effect begins (see Figure 84 (B)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode changes to the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed, thereby announcing the reach title, and an SP reach effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as an indication effect to notify whether or not the game state will be controlled to a jackpot (see Figure 84 (C)).

Here, if it is decided to display a specific cut-in effect display pattern at the start of the variable display, the reach title display 004SG070 will be displayed, and then the cut-in effect will start with the specific cut-in effect display pattern (see Figure 84 (D)). Note that if it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect, or if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect but not to display the specific cut-in effect display pattern, a cut-in display with a background color other than rainbow will be displayed.

In the SP Reach performance, a fourth background display 004SG084, which is an image different from the first background display 004SG081, which is the normal background display, and depicts space corresponding to the SP Reach performance, is displayed (see Figures 84 (E) and (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with a different appearance depending on the type of SP Reach performance.

Note that the flow of Figures 84(G) to (M) is almost the same as Figures 83(G) to (M), except that Figures 84(J) and (M) use the third background display 004SG083 for high bases, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a specific step-up effect with a rainbow background in a low base state as a specific effect to notify of a confirmed jackpot (see Figure 83 (B)), and can execute a specific cut-in effect including a cut-in with a rainbow background in a high base state (see Figure 84 (D)). The specific step-up effect and the specific cut-in effect have the same rainbow background, but their display modes are different. However, the illumination modes of the board lamps and side lamps at this time are the same. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 controls the illumination of the board lamps and side lamps based on a common brightness data table (common table), thereby reducing the amount of data required for illumination.

(Customer waiting demo performance [demo movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demo presentation will be explained with reference to Figures 85 to 91. Figure 85 (A) shows the conditions for starting and ending the demo movie display, and (B) shows the configuration of the demo movie display. Figure 86 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part while the demo movie is being displayed. Figure 87 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demo presentation. Figure 88 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Figure 89 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Figure 90 is a diagram showing display examples of (A) the first scene (company name), (B) the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) the fourth scene (warning 2). Figure 91 is a diagram comparing the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols.

The "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that the effect control CPU 120 uses to notify the user that the machine is in a waiting state where no game (e.g., variable display, big win game, small win game, etc.) is being played, i.e., a waiting state for customers, and is mainly performed by displaying a demo movie (see Figures 88 and 89) on the image display device 5.

The demo movie display, which differs from the background display during gameplay, is a display that notifies players that the machine is vacant and not being used by the player. It consists of a company name scene that informs players of which company the gaming machine is associated with, a machine introduction scene that explains the story of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the characters that appear, the effects, and specifications, a machine introduction scene that explains the title and subtitle of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a warning scene that informs players of precautions to take while playing before playing. In addition to the above content, the demo movie display may also include, for example, an introduction to the effects or explanations of the machine specifications in the machine introduction scene, and the content can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figures 85(A) to 87, the "customer waiting demo performance" (hereinafter also referred to as the demo movie display or demonstration display) is initiated when the performance control CPU 120 determines that one of the following start conditions S1 to S6 has been met. Specifically, start condition S1 is met when a first time (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 following the end of the variable display; start condition S2 is met when a second time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of a power-on designation command output from the main board 11 following power-on with initialization; and start condition S3 is met when a third time (e.g., 90 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of a power-off restoration designation command output from the main board 11 following power-on without initialization. Start condition S4 is met when a fourth time (e.g., 120 seconds) has passed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) was turned off, start condition S5 is met when a fifth time (e.g., 120 seconds) has passed since the menu screen display ended, and start condition S6 is met when a sixth time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the demo movie display that went through conditions S1 to S5 ended (from the second week onwards, the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the customer waiting demo performance has ended, similar to condition S6).

The "demo movie display" also ends when the performance control CPU 120 determines that one of the following termination conditions E1 to E4 has been met. Specifically, termination condition E1 is met when the termination time (e.g., 55 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display began, termination condition E2 is met when a start win occurs, termination condition E3 is met when touch ring 004SG035 is detected as being on, and termination condition E4 is met when an operation to start the menu screen display is performed.

In addition, even if the demo movie is not currently being displayed, if the first through sixth hours are being counted while waiting for the start conditions to be met (demo movie start waiting period), and the end conditions E2 through E4 are met, the counting will be stopped, and if the start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are subsequently met, the counting will be reset (reset).

In addition, during the waiting period for the demo movie to start, the demo movie display is not displayed, but the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed on various background displays as guide displays for adjusting the effects (see Figure 94 (A4) and Figure 180).

In addition, guidance displays related to effect adjustments may include, for example, menu guidance display 004SG401, which provides guidance on push button 31B operation to display a menu screen that allows adjustment of effect functions such as customizing and resetting the various effect functions provided on push button 31B, such as the vibration function, V flash function, auto button function, and effect mode, and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402, which provides guidance on button operations for adjusting volume and light intensity, as well as guidance displays for adjusting effect functions other than those mentioned above.

Furthermore, if termination condition E3 is met, termination condition E2 will almost never be met. In other words, since the ball-hitting handle 30 must be operated in order for a starting win to occur, termination condition E3 will generally be met before termination condition E2. However, in the following irregular cases, there is a possibility that termination condition E2 will be met without termination condition E3 being met.

Irregular Case 1: When a player encounters a "grape" (a ball stuck between the pegs), the player calls a store attendant, but the demo movie begins to be displayed before the attendant arrives. If the grape is then released, resulting in a starting win, the demo movie ends without the player operating the ball-hitting handle 30, and therefore termination condition E2 is met, not E3.

Irregular Case 2: If the on state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed by the effect control CPU 120 due to some kind of malfunction in the CPU 103 or the effect control CPU 120, a start win may occur without being able to confirm the on state of the touch sensor, and therefore end condition E2 will be met instead of end condition E3.

Note that termination condition E3, which is met when the touch sensor is in the ON state, does not have to be set as the termination condition. In such a case, the demo movie display will not end simply by operating the handle, and termination condition E2 will be met when a starting win occurs, ending the demo movie display.

As shown in Figure 85 (B), the demo movie display consists of four scenes, Scene 1 to Scene 4. In more detail, Scene 1 is the "Company Name" part (Company Name Part), which displays the names and slogans of the companies involved in the development, manufacturing, sales, etc. of the company in question (see Figures 88 (A) and (B)).

The second scene is made up of "Machine Introduction 1" to "Machine Introduction 3" parts (Machine Introduction 1-3 parts), which introduce the story of the effects performed on the pachinko gaming machine. In the "Machine Introduction 1" part (Machine Introduction 1 part), the allied characters and their names that appear in the effects are displayed (see Figure 88 (C) to (F)). In the "Machine Introduction 2-1" part (Machine Introduction 2-1 part), a confrontation scene between an allied character and an enemy character and narration text are displayed (see Figure 88 (G) and (H)). In the "Machine Introduction 2-2" part (Machine Introduction 2-2 part), a confrontation scene between an allied character and an enemy character and narration text are displayed (see Figure 88 (J) and (K)). In the "Machine Introduction 2-3" part (Machine Introduction 2-3 part), a confrontation scene between an allied character and an enemy character and narration text are displayed (see Figure 89 (M) to (O)). In the "Model Introduction 3-1" part (Model Introduction 3-1 part), a cut-in display of an allied character is displayed without text between the "Model Introduction 2-1" part (Model Introduction 2-1 part) and the "Model Introduction 2-2" part (Model Introduction 2-2 part) (see Figure 89 (I)), and in the "Model Introduction 3-2" part (Model Introduction 3-2 part), a cut-in display of an allied character is displayed without text between the "Model Introduction 2-2" (Model Introduction 2-2 part) and the "Model Introduction 2-3" part (Model Introduction 2-3 part) (see Figure 89 (L)).

The third scene is composed of a "Machine Name Main Title Name" part (main title part) in which the main title name of the pachinko gaming machine is displayed, and a "Machine Subtitle Name" part (subtitle parts 1 and 2) (see Figures 89 (P) to (V)). The "Machine Main Title Name" part (main title part) displays the main title name, "FEVER POWER," and the "Machine Subtitle Name" part displays the subtitle name, "II/All Together Ver.".

The "machine main title name" is the main theme of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and expresses the theme of the machine in one word, while the "machine subtitle name" is the subtitle of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be supplementary information added to the machine main title name (for example, "II" to indicate that this is the second installment of this title, or the heading "All Together Ver."), and the content can be changed in various ways.

The fourth scene consists of a "Warning 1" part (Warning 1 part) and a "Warning 2" part (Warning 2 part), in which warnings are issued to the player (see Figures 89 (W) to (X)). Note that the "Warning 1" part (Warning 1 part) displays a warning message to prevent players from becoming addicted to playing, and the "Warning 2" part (Warning 2 part) displays a warning message to prevent physical accidents caused by the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 86, after the start condition is met, the demo movie display displays various demo images in the order of Scene 1, Scene 2, Scene 3, and Scene 4. The display period tb2a for Scene 1 is approximately 10 seconds (tb2a = 10 seconds), the display period tb2b for Scene 2 is approximately 30 seconds (tb2b = 30 seconds), the display period tb2c for Scene 3 is approximately 10 seconds (tb2c = 10 seconds), and the display period tb2d for Scene 4 is approximately 10 seconds (tb2d = 5 seconds). The display period tb for one demo movie display is approximately 55 seconds (tb2 = 55 seconds). As shown in Figure 87, if the first demo movie display ends without any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 being met during the demo movie display—in other words, if the first demo movie display, which was started by the satisfaction of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, ends by the termination condition E1—the display transitions to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). After that, if 30 seconds, which is the sixth time, have passed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), start condition S6 is deemed to be met and the demo movie display will begin again. From then on, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) will be repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are met.

While the demo movie display is being displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, and the number of reserved memories and small symbols are maintained on display (see Figures 88 and 89). Note that while this embodiment illustrates a form in which the number of reserved memories and small symbols are displayed while the demo movie display is being displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories and small symbols may be hidden while the demo movie is being displayed.

In addition, while the demo movie display is being displayed on the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 controls the illumination of the board lamps (attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and frame lamps (main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b) based on a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo, described below), while controlling the illumination of the button lamp 9e based on a white lighting (default) brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting, described below), which does not correspond to the demo movie display. Furthermore, although background music is not output from speakers 8L and 8R, music for displaying the demo movie may be output.

The brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (the lamp data table: customer waiting demo described below) is made up of multiple brightness data tables (grandchild tables described below).

In more detail, the brightness data table for the main lamp 9a (subordinate table, described later) that constitutes the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo, described later) includes a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period from model introduction part 1 to model introduction part 2-3, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the main title part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 2, and a brightness data table corresponding to the period from warning part 1 to warning part 2, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table for each period.

In addition, the brightness data tables (grandchild tables, described later) for the side lamps 9b, attacca lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, and decorative lamps 9f that make up the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo, described later) include a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 3-1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-2 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 3-2 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-3 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of main title part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 2, and a brightness data table corresponding to the periods of warning part 1 and warning part 2, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table for each period.

Control using the brightness data table during the demo movie display will be described in detail later.

(Example of demo movie display)
Next, an example of the operation of the demo movie display will be explained based on Figs. 88, 89, and 176 to 178. In Fig. 176, (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing examples of the character display and light emission mode in each scene. Fig. 177 shows examples of the operation of (A) the first scene, (B) the third scene, and (C) the fourth scene. Fig. 178 is a comparison table showing the character animation display.

An example of an expression indicating a display mode used in the following description will be described.
A "fade-out display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image increases over time, whereas a "fade-in display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image decreases over time.

An "animated display" is, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that creates movement by changing the visibility of at least a portion of the image compared to the image one frame earlier. Visibility can be changed by changing at least one of the position, size, color, or transparency of the displayed image compared to the image one frame earlier. In other words, "animated display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement, such as "moving display," "rotating display," "enlarged display," "reduced display," and "frame-in display," but also displays that do not involve image displacement but change the display mode, such as color tone, such as "fade-out display." In this embodiment, the number of still images (frames) displayed per second of moving image is 30, i.e., the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of animation display, and refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) in which the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous image, resulting in no change in the display mode.

An example of an expression used in the following description to indicate a light emission mode will be described below.
"Wave lighting" is a lighting pattern that sequentially changes the brightness of brightness data, and has less change in brightness between each data than the flash described below. For example, it is a pattern in which the brightness of the lamp increases at a predetermined cycle, the color changes at a predetermined cycle, or a predetermined color is emitted to move within the lighting area. It is also used when simply keeping the lamp lit is not enough as a dramatic element, or when, like the flash described below, you want to emphasize the image display device 5 rather than the lamp, so that the lamp does not stand out too much.

"Flash" is a lighting pattern that alternates between high brightness data and low brightness data (including off). Depending on the intensity of the light, it can make a big difference in the brightness perceived by the player, and is a lighting pattern used for emphasis.

"Rainbow" is a pattern commonly used when the display in Figure 83 (B) is executed in a low base state, and when the effect in Figure 84 (D) is executed in a high base state. In this embodiment, a rainbow wave pattern is used in which the seven colors are lit in waves by sequentially changing the brightness data, but a rainbow flash pattern may also be used by sequentially changing the brightness data of the seven colors and alternating with low brightness data (including off) between the brightness data.

As shown in Figures 88(A) and (B), when the conditions for starting the demo movie display are met, the display of Scene 1 begins. Note that, as described below, depending on the start conditions, a switching display may be displayed before Scene 1 begins. In Scene 1, a company name background display 004SG301 consisting of white text is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 consisting primarily of a blue company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in a "small" size in the center of the screen. It then gradually expands and fades in while decreasing its transmittance (transparency), giving the appearance of the company name display 004SG302 moving from the back of the display screen to the front. Note that the display area 5S in the upper left corner of the display screen maintains the display of the number of reserved memories and small symbols. In this way, even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the small symbols remain visible, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

In addition, in the first scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) change their light emission modes (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of company name display 004SG302. For example, as the transmittance of company name display 004SG302 decreases, the brightness of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may increase or the color may change.

To explain in more detail using Figure 177(A), first, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed in a "small" size in the center of the screen, and then fades in over approximately three seconds while gradually expanding and decreasing in transmittance (transparency) (see Figure 177(A1)). When it is displayed in the specified position, a bound display is displayed in which the company name display 004SG302 collides with a wall, bounces back, and is then displayed in the specified position (see Figure 177(A2)). Then, after being displayed statically in the specified position in the center of the screen for approximately four seconds (see Figure 177(A3)), it is faded out over one second (see Figure 177(A4)).

Also, as shown in Figure 176 (A1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then light up in white. In this way, the white flash at the start of the demo movie display emphasizes that the company name display 004SG302 is about to begin displaying. Then, as the company name display 004SG302 expands and fades in, the brightness increases (white fade-in lighting), and as the company name display 004SG302 bounds, the brightness flashes white, then lights up in white, and then decreases in brightness as the display fades out (white fade-out lighting).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 1" part of the second scene begins to display, friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D appearing in various effects and text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D showing each character's name are faded in sequentially (animated display), while effect display 004SG502 is displayed in the background (see Figures 88 (C)-(F)). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 176 (A2), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in the color corresponding to each character as each character appears and their names are faded in, and then turn white.

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-1" part of the second scene begins to be displayed, an enemy character 004SG510A that appears in various effects is animated, and a text display 004SG511A stating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" is faded in (animated) (see Figures 88 (G) and (H)). Next, when the "Model Introduction 3-1" part begins to be displayed, a background display 004SG503 showing the city and an ally character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in is displayed showing the ally character flying through the city to rush to the scene (see Figure 88 (I)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-2" part of the second scene begins to be displayed again, the ally character 004SG500A, the enemy character 004SG510A, and the text display 004SG511B saying "Protect the town from the enemy!" are faded in (animated) (see Figures 88 (J) and (K)). After that, when the "Model Introduction 3-2" display begins, the ally character 004SG500A is enlarged and a cut-in display is displayed in which the effect display 004SG504 is displayed in the background (see Figure 88 (L)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-3" part of the second scene begins to be displayed again, an image of ally character 004SG500A and enemy character 004SG510A fighting, along with the text display 004SG511C saying "Don't lose!" fades in (animated) (see Figures 89 (M)-(N)). After that, all ally characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and the text display 004SG511D saying "All together!" fade in (animated) (see Figure 89 (O)).

Note that while the animation displays of ally characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene involve the ally characters expanding and contracting and fighting, the various text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D and 004SG511A-004SG511D are animated with less change in visibility than the animated displays involving movement like the ally characters 004SG500A-004SG500D, for example by fading in at the start of the display.

Also, as shown in Figure 176 (A2), in the second scene, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash green when "Model Introduction 3-1" and "Model Introduction 3-2" are displayed, but they basically light up in a white wave pattern, and the lighting pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or never) changes in conjunction with the animated display (fade-in display) of various text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D, 004SG511A-004SG511D. Basically, the lighting pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes in conjunction with the dynamic animated display of friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A running, jumping, punching, etc.

Specifically, for example, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may light up, flash, or change color in accordance with movements such as running, jumping, and punching of ally characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A.

In the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be off, but the light emission mode of the main lamp 9a may also be changed in the same way as the other panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Next, when the third scene begins to be displayed, an effect display 004SG505 is displayed in the background, and a model main title name display 004SG520A consisting of the words "FEVER POWER" and a cloud-shaped background is displayed in "small" size in the center of the display screen (default display position). It then gradually expands and its transmittance (transparency) decreases as it fades in (animated display), giving the appearance that the model main title name display 004SG520A is moving from the back of the display screen to the front (see Figures 89 (P) to (R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, consisting of the letter "II," is displayed in "extra large" size to the right of the model main title name display 004SG520A (default display position), then fades in while shrinking slightly and decreasing its transmittance (transparency), and finally bounds in "large" size to the right of "FEVER POWER" (default display position) (see Figures 89 (S) to (T)).

Furthermore, the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, which consists of the characters "Everyone Gathers Ver.", is displayed in "extra large" size in the center (default display position) in front of the model main title name display 004SG520A, then shrinks slightly and moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWER" (default display position) where it is displayed in "large" size (see Figures 89 (U) to (V)).

Also, in the third scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) basically light up in a rainbow wave pattern, and the lighting pattern changes in conjunction with the animated display of the model subtitle name displays 004SG520C and 004SG520C. In particular, in the "Model Subtitle Name" part, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash when the model subtitle name displays 004SG520C and 004SG520C move and bound to the specified display position.

Using Figure 177(B), the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, which consists of the characters "Everyone Gathered Ver.", will be explained in detail. After being displayed in "extra large" size in the center (default display position) in front of the model main title name display 004SG520A (see Figure 177(B1)), it shrinks slightly over approximately 0.5 seconds, moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWER" (default display position), and bounces around in "large" size (see Figure 177(B2)), and is then displayed statically in the default display position for 0.5 seconds (see Figure 177(B3)). After that, the entire model title name display 004SG520, consisting of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C, gradually enlarges (animates) over approximately 1.5 seconds (see Figure 177(B4)).

Also, as shown in Figure 176 (A3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in rainbow (rainbow wave) when model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed, and when model subtitle name display 004SG520B and model subtitle name display 004SG520C are displayed, they flash white in conjunction with the zoom (animation) display and then light up in rainbow (rainbow wave) lights.

Next, when the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene begins to be displayed, a dark green caution background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the anti-slip display 004SG312 is faded in (animated) in the center of the screen (see Figure 89 (W)). Next, when the "Caution 2" part begins to be displayed, the display switches to a black caution background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed (see Figure 89 (X)).

Using Figure 177(C) to explain in more detail the display of the "Warning 1" part, when the display of the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an anti-slip display 004SG312 is displayed in the center of the screen at the specified display position, fading in (animated) for 0.5 seconds (see Figures 177(C1) and (C2)). Next, after the transparency of the anti-slip display 004SG312 becomes 0% (see Figure 177(C3)), it is displayed statically for 2 seconds (see Figure 177(C4)).

Also, as shown in Figure 176 (A4), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not flash white in conjunction with the fade-in display of the anti-slip display 004SG312 in the "Warning 1" and "Warning 2" parts, but instead continue to light up in a white wave pattern in the fourth scene.

Furthermore, in the fourth scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not change their light emission mode (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the addiction prevention display 004SG312, so addiction prevention display 004SG312 is prevented from being displayed more emphasized than the company name display 004SG302, model main title name display 004SG520A, and model subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C.

(Comparison of display modes for each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 85(B), the display modes of the image display device 5 in each scene during the demo movie display will be compared with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89.

<Display mode when text starts to be displayed> In Scene 1 (company name), Scene 2 (model introduction 1, 2), Scene 3 (model main title name, model subtitle name), and Scene 4 (warning 1), various text is displayed as a fade-in (animated display), whereas in Scene 2 (model introduction 3) and Scene 4 (warning 2), various text is not displayed as a fade-in (animated display).

<Text animation display (degree of change in visibility)> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), an animation display with a "large" degree of change in visibility is displayed; in the second scene (model introduction 1, 2), an animation display with a "medium" degree of change in visibility is displayed; in the second scene (model introduction 3) and fourth scene (warning 1), an animation display with a "small" degree of change in visibility is displayed; however, in the second scene (model introduction 3) and fourth scene (warning 2), no animation is displayed for the text display.

<Text size> In the first scene (company name) and the third scene (main title name of the model), the text is displayed in small size before being enlarged to large size, while in the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the text is displayed in a fixed small or medium size from the start. Also, in the second scene (model introductions 1 and 2), the text is displayed in medium size, while in the third scene (model subtitle name), the subtitle text is displayed in extra large size before being reduced to large size.

<Background color> In the first scene (company name), the background color is white; in the second scene (model introductions 1-3), the color corresponds to the story; in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the color corresponds to the title; and in the fourth scene (warning 1), the warning 1 part is dark blue and the warning 2 part is black.

In addition, with regard to text display, for example, when an animation is used, the degree of emphasis is higher (the text is emphasized) than when there is no animation; when there is a large change in visibility during animation, the degree of emphasis is higher (the text is emphasized) than when there is a small change in visibility; and when there are many text display colors, the degree of emphasis is higher (the text is emphasized) than when there are few text colors.

As shown in Figure 85 (B), the animation display of the company name display 004SG302, consisting of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B displayed in the first scene (company name), is such that the text fades in and then bounds and expands in size, whereas the animation display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1) fades in but remains medium in size, so the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 is more emphasized than the animation display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312, i.e., the degree of change in the visibility of the text display is greater.

Furthermore, in the animated display of model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the text display fades in to a specified display position and then expands, contracts, or moves, whereas in the animated display of anti-addiction display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1), the text display simply fades in to a specified display position and then remains unchanged without expanding, contracting, or moving. Therefore, the animated display of company name display 004SG302 is more emphasized than the animated display of anti-addiction display 004SG312, i.e., the degree of change in the visibility of the text display is greater.

Here, based on Figures 177 and 178, we will compare the animated text displays in Scene 1 (company name), Scene 3 (model main title name, model subtitle name), and Scene 4 (warning 1).

As shown in Figure 178, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is displayed as a fade-in while expanding at the start of display (see Figure 177 (A1)), a bounding display when displayed at the specified position (see Figure 177 (A2)), and a static display after displayed at the specified position (see Figure 177 (A3)). In the third scene (model main title name), the model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed as a fade-in while expanding at the start of display, a static display when displayed at the specified position (see Figures 89 (P) to (R)), and an expanded display after displayed at the specified position (see Figure 177 (B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C are enlarged at the start of display and then reduced (see Figures 177 (B1) and (B2)), remain static when displayed at the specified position (see Figure 177 (B3)), and are enlarged after the specified position is displayed (see Figure 177 (B4)). In the fourth scene (warning 1), the addiction prevention display 004SG312 is faded in at the start of display (see Figures 177 (C1) and (C2)), and remain static when and after the specified position is displayed (see Figures 177 (C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display is as follows: Company name > Model title (main, sub) > Warning. The Warning is only a fade-in display at the start of display, and there is no animation when the specified position is displayed or after the specified position is displayed, so the degree of emphasis is low. On the other hand, the company name is emphasized more highly than the Warning because it uses animation display in two places, at the start of display and when the specified position is displayed, and the model title name (main, sub) is emphasized more highly than the Warning because it uses animation display in two places, at the start of display and after the specified position is displayed.

As such, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes that convey information through text display, but since it is desired to highlight each piece of information, such as the company name, model title, and warning, each can be emphasized by displaying them with a dedicated display animation. Among these, by emphasizing the animation display of the company name and model title scene compared to Warning 1 scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the text display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C is faded in to the specified display position, and then an animation display is performed in which the size is enlarged, reduced, or moved, whereas in the fourth scene (warning 1), the addiction prevention display 004SG312 is faded in to the specified display position, and then it is displayed without an animation display in which the size is enlarged, reduced, or moved.

In this way, by adding a lingering movement to the display of the machine title name, customers are drawn to the title, and by not adding a lingering movement to the warning message, the text can be read clearly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Comparison of company names and warning notices)
Here, based on Figures 90 and 91, the display modes of the number of reserved memories and small patterns in the first scene (company name) and the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) are compared.

As shown in Figure 90 (A), in the first scene (company name), a company name background display 004SG301 is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 consisting of a company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in the center of the screen. The number of reserved memories and small symbols are displayed in the display area 5S located in the upper left of the display screen.

As shown in Figure 90 (B), in the fourth scene (warning 1), a warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an animation of an addiction prevention display 004SG312 is displayed in the center of the screen. The addiction prevention display 004SG312 is composed of a heading display 004SG313 that contains the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation," and a horizontally long rectangular heading frame display 004SG314 that forms the background of the heading display 004SG313.

As shown in Figure 90 (C), in the fourth scene (warning 2), the display switches to the warning background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is also displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 consists of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A is composed of an illustration display 004SG323A showing a situation in which a player hits their head on the protruding part at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, a heading display 004SG324A consisting of the words "Watch your head", a warning detail display 004SG325A consisting of the words "The top is protruding. Be careful not to hit your head", a caution mark 004SG326A consisting of an exclamation mark within a triangular mark, and an attention mark display 004SG327A consisting of an "x" mark.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B is composed of an illustration display 004SG323B showing a situation in which a player's fingers may get caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the cabinet, a heading display 004SG324B containing the text "Watch out for pinched fingers", a warning detail display 004SG325B containing the text "The stick will move. Take care not to get your hands or fingers caught", a caution mark 004SG326B consisting of an exclamation mark within a triangular mark, and an attention mark display 004SG327B consisting of a "↓" mark.

As shown in Figure 91, in the first scene (company name), the text of the company slogan display 004SG302A is medium in size and chromatic (blue) in color, the text of the company logo display 004SG302B is large in size and chromatic (blue) in color, and the company name background display 004SG301 is achromatic (white) in color.

In the fourth scene (Warning 1), the text in the heading display 004SG313 is medium size and achromatic (white), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the warning background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue). The border of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

The background for the text displayed in the heading display 004SG313 includes not only the warning background display 004SG311, which covers the entire display screen, but also the heading frame display 004SG314, which is provided in part of the display screen.

In the fourth scene (warning 2), the illustration display 004SG323A is large in size and achromatic (white), the text in the heading display 004SG324A is medium in size and achromatic (white), the text in the warning details display 004SG325A is small in size and achromatic (white), the warning mark 004SG326A is medium in size and chromatic (yellow), the attention mark display 004SG327A is small in size and chromatic (red), and the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black).

Note that the "Caution Marks 004SG326A, 004SG326B" are marks that help make the heading text that draws the player's attention more noticeable, and the "Attention Mark Displays 004SG327A, 004SG327B" are marks that help the illustrations that show the areas the player should focus on. Unlike text, these are displayed as a single mark, so it is preferable that they be in a chromatic color so that they stand out more than the achromatic heading text display.

The reserved memory number and small pattern are "small" in size and achromatic (black) in color.

As shown in Figures 90(A) and 91, when comparing the display mode of the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the number of reserved memories and small designs, the company slogan display 004SG302A and company logo display 004SG302B have larger font sizes, use more display colors, and have higher saturation and brightness that make up the color tone than the number of reserved memories and small designs, so the company slogan display 004SG302A and company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more emphasized than the number of reserved memories and small designs.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved memories and the small design are shown in an achromatic color (black), but they may also be in a chromatic color. Even in such cases, the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more emphasized than the number of reserved memories and the small design as long as they satisfy at least one of the following conditions: a larger character size, a greater number of display colors, or higher saturation/brightness than the number of reserved memories and the small design.

Next, as shown in Figures 90(B), (C), and 91, comparing the addiction prevention display 004SG312 in Scene 4 (Warning 1) with the accident prevention display 004SG322 in Scene 4 (Warning 2), the warning background display 004SG311 is a chromatic color (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 that forms the background of the heading display 004SG313 is a chromatic color (dark blue), while the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black).

In this way, by using different background display colors for the text display of the warnings in Warning Part 1 and Warning Part 2, attention can be increased when switching from Warning Part 1 to Warning Part 2 for warnings about different phenomena, such as preventing addiction and preventing physical accidents, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Next, comparing the company name display 004SG302 in Scene 1 (company name) with the slip-in prevention display 004SG312 in Scene 4 (warning 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in Scene 4 (warning 2), the company name background display 004SG301 for the company name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the caution background display 004SG311 for the slip-in prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the caution background display 004SG321 for the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

In this way, the background display color of the text is different between the first scene (company name) and the fourth scene (warning 1, warning 2), which is different. By using different background colors for the company name display and the warning, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when they switch, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which the background display colors of the text display of the company name background display 004SG301, the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 are all different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the background display color of the text display of at least one of the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 is different from the background display color of the text display of the company name background display 004SG301.

(Comparison of lighting patterns in each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 85(B), the light emission modes of the lamps in each scene during the demo movie display will be compared with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89.

<Linkage with animated text display> In the first scene (company name), the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and the fourth scene (warning 1), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in conjunction with the animated text display (fade-in display), while in the second scene (model introduction 1, 2), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in conjunction with the animated character display, without linking (non-linking) with the animated text display (fade-in display).

<Degree of emphasis> In the first scene (company name) and the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated with a "high" degree of emphasis; in the second scene (model introductions 1-3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated with a "medium" degree of emphasis; and in the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated with a "low" degree of emphasis.

The "degree of emphasis" refers to the degree of emphasis in the light emission mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). For example, flashing (blinking), i.e., when the interval between color changes in brightness data is short, will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than when the interval between color changes in brightness data is long, such as wave lighting; when more lamps are lit, the degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) will be higher than when fewer lamps are lit; when more colors are lit, the degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) will be higher than when fewer colors are lit; when a high proportion of chromatic colors is used, the degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) will be higher than when a low proportion of chromatic colors is used; when lit in rainbow, the degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) will be higher than when not lit in rainbow; and when brightness is high, the degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) will be higher than when brightness is low.

Specifically, based on Figure 85 (B) and with reference to Figure 176, the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "high," the second scene (model introductions 1-3) has a green flash but is not linked to the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "medium," the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "high," and the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) is not linked to the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "low."

In other words, the degree of lamp emphasis is higher when the lighting mode is for the company name than when it is for a warning, and also higher when the lighting mode is for the title name than when it is for a warning. And because the lighting mode linked to the animation display for the company name changes more frequently than for the model title, the lighting mode for the company name is more emphasized than the lighting mode for the model title. Therefore, the relationship of lamp emphasis is company name > model title (main, sub) > warning.

Furthermore, since multiple panel lamps and frame lamps are provided in multiple locations, when comparing the degree of emphasis between the light emitted by a first lamp consisting of multiple lamps and the light emitted by a second lamp consisting of multiple lamps, it is sufficient to compare the light emission pattern when averaging all of the first lamps with the light emission pattern when averaging all of the second lamps, rather than comparing the degree of emphasis between one first lamp and one second lamp.

<Rainbow> In the "Model Subtitle Name" part (e.g., Figure 89 (P)-(V)) of the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the board lamp and frame lamp are illuminated in a rainbow pattern. The brightness data table (grandchild table, described below) used in this case is the same as the rainbow brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01), described below) used in the step-up effect (see Figure 83 (B)) and cut-in effect (see Figure 84 (D)) described above.

<Specific Lighting> Only in specific frames (e.g., Figure 89 (S) and (U)) of the model subtitle name in the third scene (title name), the board lamp and frame lamp are illuminated with a white flash (specific mode). The brightness data tables used in this case (grandchild tables, described below) are the brightness data tables for subtitle 1 and subtitle 2, which are different from the main title brightness data table used for the model main title name, and the white flash (specific mode) is illuminated in conjunction with the animated character display of the character display.

As shown in Figure 85 (B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introductions 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 86) different from the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is used, and in the second scene (model introduction 2-2), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introductions 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 86) common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is used in the first scene (company name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (the grandchild table corresponding to model introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3) includes brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in scene 2 (model introduction 2-1), and does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in scene 2 (model introduction 2-2).

As such, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text display, but since we particularly want to convey the company name, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, we can highlight it in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

As shown in Figure 85 (B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 86) is used, which is different from the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to main title part), brightness data table for subtitle 1, and brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 86) that is common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to main title part), brightness data table for subtitle 1, and brightness data table for subtitle 2 are used. The table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) includes brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), while the brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3) does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), or the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

As such, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text display, but since we particularly want to convey the model name, we use brightness data linked to the display animation, which allows us to highlight it in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the aspects of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) (see Figure 86) are more emphasized (highlighted) than the aspects of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the attention 1 and attention 2 parts) (see Figure 86), and the aspects of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), subtitle 1 brightness data table, and subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (see Figure 86) are more emphasized (highlighted) than the aspects of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the attention 1 and attention 2 parts).

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "high," the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "high," while the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) is not linked to the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "low."

As such, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes that convey information through text display, but since it is desired to highlight each piece of information, such as the company name, model title, and warnings, this can be done by emitting dedicated light for each. In particular, by emphasizing the lighting conditions in the company name and model title display scenes compared to the warning scenes, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) are more emphasized than the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the attention 1 and attention 2 parts), and the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the subtitle 1 brightness data table, and the subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the subtitle 1 and 2 parts) than the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the attention 1 and attention 2 parts) when they are either (1) modes with more flashing, (2) modes with more lit colors, (3) modes with a larger number of light-emitting means, or (4) modes with higher brightness, thereby emphasizing the company name and model title and resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the aspects of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) are emphasized more than the aspects of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), subtitle 1 brightness data table, and subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts), thereby further emphasizing the company name and making it easier for players to identify which company the gaming machine is associated with, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, while the demo movie is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts), and when a step-up performance (see FIG. 83(B)) or a cut-in performance (see FIG. 84(D)) is being performed, it controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the step-up performance or cut-in performance). The rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) used while the demo movie is being displayed and the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the step-up performance or cut-in performance) used when a step-up performance (see FIG. 83(B)) or a cut-in performance (see FIG. 84(D)) is being performed are a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant. Furthermore, by using the same brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow as the brightness data table used in response to specific effects executed during play (for example, step-up effects and cut-in effects), there is no need to increase capacity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) after game play has ended in a low base state (normal state), the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) after game play has ended in a high base state (special state), and the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the step-up effect and cut-in effect) used when a step-up effect (see Figure 83 (B)) (specific effect) that can be executed in a low base state (normal state) and a cut-in effect (see Figure 84 (D)) that can be executed in a high base state (special state) are executed are a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant. Furthermore, by using the same brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow as the brightness data table used for the specific effects that can be performed in the normal state and the special effects that can be performed in the special state, there is no need to increase capacity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In addition, the step-up effect (see Figure 83 (B)) (specific effect) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) and the cut-in effect (see Figure 84 (D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) are effects that definitively notify that control has been entered into the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, the brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)) used for effects that definitively indicate that control has been entered into the jackpot gaming state is also used for the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The brightness data table for subtitle 1 and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) are brightness data tables that use multiple brightness data to illuminate the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) in a lighting pattern that is linked to the animation display of the model/subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C.

In this way, the main title name is displayed first, followed by the subtitle name, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. Therefore, by illuminating the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) in conjunction with the animation of the subtitle name display, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 86, the multiple brightness data that make up the company name brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) are brightness data configured to cause the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means), panel lamp, and side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means) to emit light, and the multiple brightness data that make up the introduction brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, model introduction 3-1, 3-2 parts) are brightness data configured to cause the side lamp 9b and panel lamp to emit light and not cause the main lamp 9a to emit light.

As such, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text displays. In the company name display scene, both the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means) are illuminated. In the model introduction scene, the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means) are illuminated, but the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) is not illuminated. This makes it possible to relatively emphasize the first scene in which the company name is displayed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, the first light-emitting means is a panel lamp and a side lamp 9b, and the second light-emitting means is a main lamp 9a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one frame lamp may be used as the second light-emitting means that does not emit light in the second scene, and at least one panel lamp may be used as the first light-emitting means.

Also, as a variant, the performance control CPU 120 may control the first light-emitting means (e.g., a panel lamp) in the model introduction part of the second scene using the introduction 1 brightness data table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part), control the first light-emitting means (e.g., a panel lamp) in the model introduction 2 part using the introduction 2 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts), and control the second light-emitting means (e.g., a frame lamp) in the model introduction 1 part and the model introduction 2 part using one brightness data table (one grandchild table).

As such, during the demo movie display, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, and in the company name display scene, both the first and second light-emitting means are made to emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, and in the model introduction 1 and model introduction 2 parts, the first light-emitting means is made to emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, but the second light-emitting means is made to emit light in a common light-emitting mode, thereby relatively emphasizing the company name display scene and, as a result, achieving optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in the model introduction 1 part of the second scene using a single model introduction 1 luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part) that is different from the company luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part), the model main title luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the model subtitle luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the subtitle 1 and 2 parts), the warning 1 luminance data table, and the warning 2 luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the warning 1 and 2 parts), and may control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in the model introduction 2 part of the second scene using the single luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part).

As such, there are multiple situations in which information is conveyed through text displays, and since it is desirable to highlight information such as company names, model titles, and warnings, each can be highlighted by emitting a dedicated light to highlight it compared to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the execution period of the model introduction scene, which includes Model Introduction Part 1 and Model Introduction Part 2 (30 seconds), is longer than the execution period of the company name display scene (10 seconds), and the execution period of the model introduction scene, which includes Model Introduction Part 1 and Model Introduction Part 2 (30 seconds), is longer than the execution period of the warning display scene (5 seconds). The company name text display and warning text display may be displayed at times other than when the demo movie is being displayed. In this way, by being able to highlight the model introduction scene and title name display scene, which are only displayed during the demo movie, for a longer period of time, it is possible to achieve optimal customer waiting control.

It is also possible to display the company name text and warning text even when the demo movie is not being displayed. For example, the company name text and warning text may be displayed during the ending period after the jackpot round has ended, or the same display as that displayed during the demo movie may be displayed. In this case, the display time may be set shorter than during the demo movie to avoid disrupting the tempo of the jackpot and high base state.

(Lighting patterns of lamps corresponding to game status)
Next, the light emission modes of the lamps corresponding to the game status will be explained with reference to Fig. 92 and Fig. 93. Fig. 92 is a diagram showing the light emission modes of the lamps corresponding to the game status. Fig. 93 (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement positions of the lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in Figure 92, the panel lamp and frame lamp arranged on the pachinko gaming machine 1 emit light in different ways depending on the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, when an initialization notification is made following a cold start, when it is controlled to a low base state, when it is controlled to a high base state, when a demo movie display is being shown, and when an error notification, described below, is being made.

Specifically, during the initialization notification period, the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e flash in red.

In the low base state, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is used, the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in a wave pattern with blue as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

In a low-probability, high-base state (time-saving state), a time-saving background brightness data table (lamp data table: background time-saving) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with green as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white. In a high-probability, high-base state (probability variable state), a probability variable background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with purple as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white. Hereinafter, the time-saving background brightness data table and the probability variable background brightness data table will be collectively referred to as the high-base background brightness data table (or high-B background brightness data table).

During the execution of the demo performance (demo movie display), the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b change their light emission patterns with "white" as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white."

When the error notification is in progress, the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a color corresponding to the status (low base status, high base status, demo performance), while the main lamp 9a flashes in red and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

The "primary color" refers to the color that forms the basis of the overall color scheme for each period. For example, it may be the color that occupies the most light-emitting time and light-emitting area (number of lamps) during each period, and it may be a color other than those listed above. It may also include multiple colors with different brightness, lightness, saturation, etc. within a given hue. If the primary color is "blue," it may be a color similar to "blue."

For example, let's explain similar colors based on Figure 179. Colors have three attributes: hue (color tone), lightness (brightness, brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Similar colors" include: 1. combinations of adjacent colors with the same tone (hue group with the same brightness, lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and hues; 2. combinations of the same hue but with different tones; and 3. combinations of colors that differ only in lightness or saturation.

An example of "1. Combinations of adjacent colors (adjacent colors) with the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness, luminance) and saturation (vividness))" above is explained based on Figures 179 (A) and (B). When the three primary colors of light, red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F], are arranged at 120-degree angular intervals on a color wheel with a predetermined number of colors (24 in this case), each of the three colors is considered to be dissimilar to one another. Colors with a hue difference within an angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on this color wheel are considered "similar colors," and combinations are not limited to adjacent colors on the color wheel.

For example, if red (R) is the base color, colors within a range of 30 degrees toward yellow (Y) and 30 degrees toward light blue (C) (60 degrees total) are considered to be similar colors to red (R). If green (G) is the base color, colors within a range of 30 degrees toward reddish purple (M) and 30 degrees toward yellow (Y) (60 degrees total) are similar colors to green (G). If blue (B) is the base color, colors within a range of 30 degrees toward light blue (C) and 30 degrees toward reddish purple (M) (60 degrees total) are similar colors to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is more than or equal to 24, combinations of colors with a hue difference within a range of 30 to 60 degrees on the color wheel can be considered "similar colors."

Furthermore, it is preferable that similar colors include combinations of colors that fall within warm colors, such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that give a warm feeling, and cool colors, such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that give a cold feeling, as well as combinations of colors that fall within neutral colors, such as green and purple, which are chromatic colors that fall between warm and cool colors.

As shown in Figure 93 (A), the board lamps include an attacca lamp 9c built into the special variable winning ball device 7 located in the lower right corner of the game board 2, a movable body lamp 9d built into the movable body 32 located above the image display device 5, and a decorative lamp 9f built into the decorative body located to the left of the image display device 5. Note that lamps located on the game board 2 may also include lamps other than those listed above (for example, lamps built into winning devices).

The frame lamps include a main lamp 9a located at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, side lamps 9b located on the left and right sides, and a button lamp 9e located on the push button 31B. Note that the gaming machine frame 3 may also include lamps other than those listed above (for example, lamps built into the ball-hitting control handle 30 or speakers 8L and 8R).

In addition, the panel lamp, the attacca lamp 9c, is made up of multiple LEDs, the movable body lamp 9d is made up of multiple LEDs, the decorative lamp 9f is made up of multiple LEDs, the main lamp 9a is made up of multiple LEDs, the side lamp 9b is made up of multiple LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is made up of multiple LEDs.

Furthermore, Figure 93(B) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the various lamps shown in Figure 93(A), and in the following explanation, for the sake of convenience, the schematic diagram shown in Figure 93(B) may be used.

(Customer waiting demo performance begins. Fluctuation stop version.)
Next, the flow from when the variable display is stopped to when the customer waiting demo effect begins will be explained with reference to Figures 94 to 99 and 180. Figure 94 (A1) to (A8) show an example of operation when the customer waiting demo effect is initiated after the variable display of the first special symbol ends in a low base state. Figure 95 (A4) to (A5) show the main parts of Figure 94. Figure 96 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo effect in a low base state. Figure 97 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo effect in a low base state. Figure 98 (B1) to (B8) show an example of operation of the customer waiting demo effect in a high base state. Figure 99 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo effect in a high base state. Figure 100 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo effect in a high base state. Figure 101 shows an example of operation when the customer waiting demo effect begins after the pachinko gaming machine is started by cold start (power-on with initialization). Fig. 102 is a timing chart showing the flow in which a pachinko gaming machine starts a customer waiting demo effect after being started by a cold start. Fig. 103 is a diagram showing an example of operation in which a pachinko gaming machine starts a customer waiting demo effect after being started by a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state. Fig. 104 is a timing chart showing the flow in which a pachinko gaming machine starts a customer waiting demo effect after being started by a hot start in a low base state. Fig. 105 is a diagram showing an example of operation in which a pachinko gaming machine starts a customer waiting demo effect after being started by a hot start in a high base state. Fig. 106 is a timing chart showing the flow in which a pachinko gaming machine starts a customer waiting demo effect after being started by a hot start in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo effect is started when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 94 to 97.

As shown in Figures 94 and 96, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state, if a preview effect or reach effect has been determined to be executed, these effects will be executed (see Figure 94 (A1)), although this is not specifically shown. During the variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are not displayed.

The board lamp and frame lamp will begin to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e will continue to light up in white based on the default brightness data table. Also, normal background BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R. When a preview or reach effect is executed, a brightness data table for the preview or reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the preview or reach effect) is set, and lighting control and BGM output are carried out in a manner appropriate to the effect.

Next, when the variable display ends and the losing confirmed symbol combination (for example, "326") is displayed statically (see Figure 94 (A2)), a customer waiting demo designation command is sent from CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 starts timing (120 seconds) on the demo movie start waiting timer, entering the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Note that the output of background music is stopped, but it may be set to fade out when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing and the demo end conditions have not been met, the menu guide display 004SG401 will be displayed in frame-in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see Figure 94 (A3)), and when it moves to the right to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 94 (A4)).

If another 90 seconds pass, and 120 seconds pass since the demo movie start wait timer began timing without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met, and the customer waiting demo performance begins. On the display screen, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 94 (A5) to (A8)). Additionally, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and control of the light emission mode based on white begins based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

When starting the demo movie display in this way, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In more detail, as shown in Figure 95 (A4), during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen displays a missing confirmed symbol combination (decorative symbol) frozen against the background of the first background display 004SG081. In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before switching from the first background display 004SG081 to the demo movie display, a fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the confirmed losing symbols (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the confirmed losing symbols (decorative symbols) gradually increases, the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) is switched to the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) switch from a blue wave illumination to a white-based illumination mode (see Figures 95 (A41) and (A42)). Then, after the transparency of the first background display 004SG081 and the losing combination of confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) approaches 100% and the display screen whites out (see Figure 95 (A42)), the demo movie display begins (see Figure 95 (A5)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after game play in the low base state has ended (the variable display has stopped display), and displays the demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period has ended. Then, before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative symbols displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo effect, it switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

Therefore, by using a gradual design in which the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the demo movie display begins, customers can focus on the change rather than starting everything at once, and be made aware of the start of the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify demo movie display. In response, the display control unit 123 sends the performance control CPU 120 an extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display. Upon receiving the extended command: BF01, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 waits a predetermined period of time tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance. 96, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo effect start condition S1 was met, the fade-out display (switching display) of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative symbols begins, and after the display screen whites out, the company name display 004SG302 begins displaying. In other words, when the demo effect start condition S1 is met, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). At the same time, the effect control CPU 120 begins switching the display content from the normal background display to a demo movie display including a fade-out display (switching display) of the normal background display. However, the fade-out display (switching display) as the demo movie display begins after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display begins after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched. In particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see Figure 94 (A5)) of the demo movie display begins after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, lighting control for the customer waiting demo of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, the lighting control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) switches first, without switching the display using the fade-out display described above, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable (see Figures 95 (A31), (A32), and 96).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of the demo movie display is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be changed in various ways. Also, while a fade display is used as the switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be used, or the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern may be maintained without a fade display.

Also, as shown in Figure 96, if 55 seconds pass after the start of the demo movie display without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo effect end condition E1 has been met, and the first demo movie display ends. Then, the display screen displays the first background display 004SG081 and the losing combination of confirmed symbols (decorative symbols), as well as the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see Figure 94 (A4)). Furthermore, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table, and illumination control is performed based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and illumination control is performed for the button lamp 9e based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends when demo effect termination condition E1 is met, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated from the second time onwards until one of demo effect termination conditions E2 to E4 is met. From the second time onwards, upon the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern are displayed, and along with the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern, an animated display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 begins. The demo movie display begins 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see Figure 180).

Note that the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same animation display as the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 the first time (see Figure 94 (A3)).

Also, when the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) changes to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), as explained in FIG. 95, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after play in the low base state has ended (the variable display has stopped), displays a demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period has ended, and controls the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) during the first customer waiting period, and controls the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period, while controlling the illumination of button lamp 9e during the first and second customer waiting periods using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light) that is different from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo).

In this way, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a fixed state, this can prevent the player from making a mistake, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In more detail, as mentioned above, when using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit and flashed in conjunction with the display mode of the demo movie display. Therefore, for example, if button lamp 9e lights up when an operation prompting display encouraging operation of push button 31B is displayed in a performance introduction scene, there is a possibility that the player will misunderstand and perform an unnecessary operation, so button lamp 9e is set to a fixed mode.

Also, as shown in Figure 97, when the variable display of the second special pattern begins due to an irregular win or the like in a low base state, the flow from the end of the variable display to the start of the demo movie display is the same as when the variable display of the first special pattern begins in a low base state as shown in Figure 96, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
Next, an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo presentation when the gaming state is in a high base state will be described with reference to Figures 98 to 99.

As shown in Figures 98 and 99, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state, if a preview effect or reach effect has been determined to be executed, these effects will be executed (see Figure 98 (B1)), although this is not specifically shown. During the variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are not displayed.

The board lamp and frame lamp will begin to light up in purple (or green) waves based on the high B background brightness data table for the probability change (or time reduction) (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e will continue to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights up in white). Also, BGM for the high B background is output from speakers 8L and 8R. When a preview or reach effect is executed, the brightness data table for the preview or reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the preview or reach effect) is set, and lighting control and BGM output are carried out in a manner appropriate to the effect.

Next, when the variable display ends and the losing confirmed symbol combination (for example, "326") is displayed statically (see Figure 98 (B2)), a customer waiting demo designation command is sent from CPU 103, and the performance control CPU 120 starts timing (120 seconds) on the demo movie start waiting timer, entering the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Note that the output of background music is stopped, but it may be set to fade out when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing and the demo end conditions have not been met, the menu guide display 004SG401 will be displayed in frame-in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see Figure 98 (B3)), and when it moves to the right to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 98 (B4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer began timing without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met, and the customer waiting demo performance begins. On the display screen, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 98 (B5) to (B8)). Additionally, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and control of the white-based light emission mode begins based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

When starting the demo movie display in this way, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of confirmed losing symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

Specifically, during the first customer waiting period (waiting for the demo movie to begin), the display screen displays a missing combination of confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) frozen against the background of the third background display 004SG083. Additionally, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the high-B background brightness data table for the probability variation (or time-saving) (lamp data table: background time-saving, or lamp data table: background probability variation).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before switching from the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) to the demo movie display, a fade-out display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of the confirmed symbols that have lost (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG084) and the combination of the confirmed symbols that have lost (decorative symbols) gradually increases, the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is switched to the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) change from a purple or green wave illumination to a white-based illumination mode (see Figures 95 (A41) and (A42)). Then, as the transparency of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the losing combination of confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) approaches 100%, the display screen turns white, and then the demo movie begins to be displayed (see Figure 98 (B5)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after play in the high base state has ended (the variable display has stopped display), and displays the demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period has ended. Then, before switching the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo effect, it switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

Therefore, by using a gradual design in which the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the demo movie display begins, customers can focus on the change rather than starting everything at once, and be made aware of the start of the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify demo movie display. In response, the display control unit 123 sends the performance control CPU 120 an extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display. Upon receiving the extended command: BF01, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 waits a predetermined period of time tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo performance start condition S1 was met, the performance control CPU 120 starts fading out (switching display) the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern, and after the display screen goes white, starts displaying the company name display 004SG302. In other words, when the demo effect start condition S1 is met, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and begins illumination control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), while also beginning switching control to switch the display content from a high base background display to a demo movie display including a fade-out display (switching display) of the high base background display, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie begins after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display begins after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched. In particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see Figure 98 (B5)) of the demo movie display begins after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed. Therefore, from the outside, lighting control for the customer waiting demo of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, the lighting control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) switches first, without switching the display using the fade-out display described above, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable (see Figures 95 (A31), (A32), and 99).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is set to approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be changed in various ways. Also, while a fade display is used as the switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be used, or the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern may be maintained without a fade display.

Also, as shown in Figure 99, if 55 seconds have passed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo effect end condition E1 has been met, and the first demo movie display ends. Then, the display screen displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the losing combination of confirmed symbols (decorative symbols), as well as the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and the second waiting period for the first customer (waiting period for the demo movie to start) begins (see Figure 94 (A4)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and light emission control is performed based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and light emission control for the button lamp 9e is performed based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends when demo effect termination condition E1 is met, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated from the second time onwards until one of demo effect termination conditions E2 to E4 is met. From the second time onwards, upon the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern are displayed, and along with the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern, an animated display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 begins. The demo movie display begins 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see Figure 180).

Note that the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same animation display as the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 the first time (see Figure 98 (B3)).

In addition, when the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) changes to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state has ended (the variable display has stopped display), displays a demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period has ended, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period, and displays the demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the game in the high base state has ended (the variable display has stopped display). During this period, the illumination of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is controlled using a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while during the first and second customer waiting periods, the illumination of button lamp 9e is controlled using a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) different from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo).

In this way, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a fixed state, this can prevent the player from making a mistake, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant state in both the low base state and the high base state, it is possible to prevent confusion in both the low base state and the high base state, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, during the first customer waiting period, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a brightness data table for the high-value B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and during the first scene (e.g., first scene (company name)) during the second customer waiting period, it controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a company brightness data table corresponding to the first scene (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part), and during the second scene (e.g., second scene (machine introductions 1 to 3)) during the second customer waiting period, it controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a company brightness data table corresponding to the second scene (machine introductions 1, 2-1 , 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2 parts) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), and in the first scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights white) that is different from the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the introduction 1 to 3 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2 parts), and in the second scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights white).

In this way, switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B could lead the player to mistakenly believe that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the state constant, this can prevent the player from making a mistake, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, one default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) is a brightness data table that is different from the promotion effect brightness data tables (lamp data table: button flashing white, lamp data table: button flashing red) used when a promotion effect encouraging the operation of push button 31B (see Figure 83 (G)) is executed, and the brightness data that constitutes the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) has less change in brightness than the brightness data that constitutes the promotion effect brightness data tables (lamp data table: button flashing white, lamp data table: button flashing red).

By doing this, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination) is configured with brightness data that makes the button less emphasized than when the push button 31B is being prompted to be operated. This prevents the player from mistakenly thinking that the push button 31B is being prompted to be operated, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The default brightness data table may also be configured with brightness data for turning off the button lamp 9e. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided on the gaming machine frame 3, but by managing it separately from the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3 rather than using the same brightness data table, it is possible to design it appropriately to prevent players from mistakenly believing that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 96, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol has ended, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to effect adjustment at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed (see FIG. 94 (A2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display has ended, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed.

Also, as shown in Figure 99, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special pattern has ended, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) starts, but instead displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 98 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display has ended, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) starts to be displayed, while the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by not displaying a guide display immediately after the variable display ends, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promptings for adjustments to the presentation. Also, since there is a possibility that the player may have left their seat once the demo movie display has ended, prompting the player to adjust the presentation immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display can encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in Figure 100, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or the like in a high base state, the flow from the end of the variable display to the start of the demo movie display is the same as when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state as shown in Figure 99, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97, in a low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends due to an irregular win or the like, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to effect adjustments at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed (see FIG. 94 (A2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed.

Also, as shown in Figure 100, in a high base state, after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended due to an irregular winning or the like, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) starts, but instead displays the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 98 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display has ended, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) starts to be displayed, while the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, after the variable display of the first special symbol has ended in either the low base state or the high base state, or even after the variable display of the second special symbol has ended, by not displaying a guide message immediately after the variable display has ended, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promptings for adjustments to the presentation. Also, since there is a possibility that the player may have left their seat once the demo movie display has ended, prompting the player to adjust the presentation immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display can encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

<Cold start>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up by cold start (power-on with initialization) and then starts a customer waiting demo performance will be described with reference to Figures 101 and 102.

As shown in Figures 101 (C1) and 102, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start, the display of the start-up preparation display 004SG600 begins on the image display device 5 from the start-up timing. Three seconds after the start-up timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B begin to light up, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives a power-on command and a first game state background command from CPU 103, the display of the start-up preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initialization in progress display 004SG610 begins to replace the start-up preparation display 004SG600 (see Figure 101 (C2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 and other operations are started as initial operation control (not shown). Additionally, the panel lamp and frame lamp begin flashing red based on the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification), and speakers 8L and 8R begin to emit an initialization notification sound. Additionally, the demo movie start waiting timer begins timing (60 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, when 10 seconds have passed since the power-on command and the first game state background command were received, the initialization process is completed, the display of the initialization in progress display 004SG610 ends, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 begins (see Figure 101 (C3)). At this time, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden. In addition, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light). In addition, background music output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, if 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started timing without the demo end conditions being met, the menu guide display 004SG401 will be displayed in frame-in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see Figure 101 (C4)), and when it moves to the right to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 101 (C5)).

Another 30 seconds pass, and if 60 seconds pass after the demo movie start wait timer starts timing without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S2 has been met, and the customer waiting demo performance begins. On the display screen, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figure 101 (C6) to (C9)). Additionally, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white begins based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e continues to illuminate in white based on the default brightness data table.

The subsequent flow is the same as the flow in the low base state shown in Figures 94 to 96, so detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

<Hot start (low base state)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then the customer waiting demo performance is started will be explained based on Figures 103 to 104.

As shown in Figures 103 (D1) and 104, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode in a low base state, the image display device 5 begins displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after the startup timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B begin to light up. At the same time, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a power outage recovery command and a first game state background command from the CPU 103, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light), and background music output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. The demo movie start waiting timer also begins timing (90 seconds), marking the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period).

Next, two seconds after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command and the first game state background command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 begins (see FIG. 103 (D2)), and initial operation control such as checking the movable body 32 begins (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer began timing without the demo end condition being met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in frame-in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 103 (D3)), and when it moves to the right to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 103 (D4)).

If another 60 seconds pass, and 90 seconds pass since the demo movie start wait timer began timing without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S3 has been met, and the customer waiting demo performance begins. On the display screen, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figure 103 (D5) to (D8)). In addition, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and control of the light emission mode based on white begins based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

The subsequent flow is the same as the flow in the low base state shown in Figures 94 to 96, so detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

<Hot start (high base state)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then the customer waiting demo performance is started will be explained based on Figures 105 to 106.

As shown in Figures 105 (E1) and 106, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in a high base state, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 begins on the image display device 5 from the start timing. Three seconds after the activation timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B begin to light up, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command and the second and third game state background designation command from CPU 103, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in purple (or green) waves based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and background music output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In addition, the demo movie start waiting timer starts timing (90 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command and the second and third game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) begins (see FIG. 105 (E2)), and initial operation control such as checking the movable body 32 begins (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer began timing without the demo end condition being met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed frame-in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 105 (E3)), and when it moves to the right to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 105 (E4)).

If another 60 seconds pass, and 90 seconds pass after the demo movie start waiting timer starts without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo effect start condition S3 has been met, and the customer waiting demo effect begins. On the display screen, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo effect period) begins (see Figure 105 (E5)-(E8)). In addition, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) switch from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white begins based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

The subsequent flow is the same as the flow for the high base state in Figures 98 to 100, so detailed explanations of each will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 104 and 106, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then a hot start is performed, the presentation control CPU 120 does not display the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guide displays) related to presentation adjustment at the start timing of the display of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), but instead displays the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figures 103 (D2) and 105 (E2)), and then displays a demo movie display. After the demo movie display has finished, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) starts to be displayed, while the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 102, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then a cold start is performed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to effect adjustment at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed (see FIG. 101 (C3)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed.

As such, the startup situation before an amusement parlor opens can be either a hot start (power-on without initialization) or a cold start (power-on with initialization). In either startup situation, amusement parlor staff can check the displays by checking the background display after power-on, checking the demo movie display, and checking the information display, thereby improving the efficiency of the checks. Furthermore, when the background display is displayed when the amusement parlor opens and players are welcomed, the information display will be the background display, allowing for thorough guidance on presentation adjustments from the timing of the start of play, providing players with a suitable gaming environment and, as a result, enabling optimal customer waiting control.

In the present embodiment, after a hot start or cold start, the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed, followed by the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402, and then the demo movie display begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the demo movie display may begin after the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed, without the menu guide display 004SG401 or the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 being displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 102 and 104, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 while in a low base state and the power is then turned on, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to effect adjustment at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed (see Figures 101 (C3) and 103 (D2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed.

Also, as shown in Figure 105, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 in a high base state and the power is then turned on, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to presentation adjustment at the start timing of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), but will instead display the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 105 (D2)), and then display the demo movie display. After the demo movie display has ended, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) starts to be displayed, while the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, the startup situation before the gaming parlor opens can be either a low base state or a high base state, and so to make it possible to check in the background which state the game parlor was in when it started up, no guidance display is displayed to avoid any interference.If the background is displayed again afterwards, it is likely that the state has already been confirmed, so by displaying the guidance display from the timing when the background display begins to be displayed, when the background display is displayed when the gaming parlor opens and players are welcomed, it will be the background display with the guidance display displayed.This means that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing of the start of play, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

After the variable display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 are not displayed, and instead the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed. After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 are displayed in a specific animation (fade-in display), thereby changing the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). ), then a demo movie display is displayed, and after the display period of the demo movie display has elapsed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 are displayed in a common animation display (frame-in display) with the first animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402, so as to be superimposed on the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, by not displaying the information display immediately after the variable display has ended, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promptings for adjustments to the presentation, and once the demo movie display has ended, by prompting the user to adjust the presentation as soon as the demo movie display switches to the background display, it is possible to encourage the user to play in a suitable gaming environment.Furthermore, when displaying the information display immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, the information display is displayed using the same animation as when the information display is displayed after the variable display has ended, which makes it possible to highlight the fact that the information display has been displayed without incurring any costs, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, a frame-in display is used as an animation display for the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement direction, movement speed, display position, etc. are not limited to those described above. Furthermore, other types of animation display, such as a fade-in display, a moving display, or an enlarged display, may also be used.

Also, as shown in Figures 96, 99, 104, 106, and 180, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state; when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state; when 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 having been started up by a hot start in the low base state; and when 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 having been started up by a hot start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 90 seconds (third specific periods tc4, tc5).

In this way, if the demo movie display were to be displayed immediately after the variable display ends, there is a possibility that the player has not yet changed, which would be annoying, so the longer times tc1 and tc2 are set to 120 seconds. However, after a hot start, since it is the gaming store staff, not the players, who are present, the shorter times tc4 and tc5 are set to 90 seconds, allowing the gaming store staff to check the demo movie display immediately, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in Figures 96, 99, 102, and 180, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have passed since the variable display ended in the low base state, displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have passed since the variable display ended in the high base state, displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 having started up in a cold start in the low base state, and displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 having started up in a cold start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

If the demo movie display were to be displayed immediately after the variable display ends, there is a possibility that the player has not yet changed, which would be annoying, so a longer time, tc1 and tc2, of 120 seconds, is set. After a cold start (power-on with initialization), this is the first start method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement parlor, so a shorter time, tc3, of 60 seconds, is set so that the demo movie display is displayed immediately. This allows gaming parlor staff to immediately check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the newly introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in Figures 102, 104, 106 and 180, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have passed since the power outage recovery designation command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being started up with a hot start in a low base state, displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have passed since the power outage recovery designation command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being started up with a hot start in a high base state, displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on designation command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being started up with a cold start in a low base state, and displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on designation command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being started up with a cold start in a high base state. In this case, 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5) is a longer period than 60 seconds (second specific period tc3).

As such, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement parlor. Therefore, by displaying the demo movie immediately, gaming parlor staff can immediately check the demo movie and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in Figures 96, 99 and 102, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed after the variable display has ended in the low base state, and then displays the demo movie display again after 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display has ended; and in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed after the variable display has ended, and then displays the demo movie display again after 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display has ended; A demo movie display is displayed when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the fact that pachinko gaming machine 1 was started up by a cold start, and when 30 seconds (a predetermined period) have passed since the demo movie display ended, the demo movie display is again displayed; when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the fact that pachinko gaming machine 1 was started up by a cold start in a high base state, the demo movie display is displayed when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received, and when 30 seconds (a predetermined period) have passed since the demo movie display ended, the demo movie display is again displayed. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

If the demo movie display were to be displayed immediately after the variable display ends, there is a possibility that the player has not yet changed, which would be annoying, so a longer time of 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is set. Since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement parlor, a shorter time of tc3 = 60 seconds is set so that the demo movie display is displayed immediately, allowing gaming parlor staff to immediately check the demo movie display and gain a deeper understanding of the introduced machine. Furthermore, by keeping the same period of time between the demo movie display being displayed once and the demo movie display being displayed again in all situations - after the variable display in a low base state ends, after the fluctuation in a high base state ends, and after a cold start - the demo movie display can be displayed consistently, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 104 and 106, after startup by hot start, a startup preparation display 004SG600 is displayed indicating that startup is in progress (see Figures 103 (D1) and 105 (E1)), and at the timing related to displaying the display indicating startup, the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are controlled using a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and at the timing related to displaying startup preparation display 004SG600, button lamp 9e is controlled using one default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white).

In this way, by illuminating using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before the background display is displayed, it is possible to check whether the panel lamp and frame lamp are operating normally at the start-up stage, and then seamlessly switch to the illumination mode for when customers are waiting, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demo performance, time lapse version)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo effect ends over time will be explained based on Figures 107 to 109. Figures 107 (A) to (E) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. Figure 108 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. Figure 109 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends over time in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo effect ends over time when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 107 and 108.

As shown in Figures 107 and 108, in the low base state, if the first demo movie display, which was initiated when one of start conditions S1 to S5 was met, ends when end condition E1 is met, i.e., 55 seconds have passed since the demo movie display began, the system transitions to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). If 30 seconds, the sixth hour, has passed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), start condition S6 is deemed to be met, and the demo movie display begins again. From then on, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until end conditions E2 to E4 for the demo movie display end.

In more detail, as shown in Figure 107 (A), when the second part of the warning message for the fourth and final scene of the demo movie is displayed, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a white-based illumination pattern based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e lights up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights up white).

Then, when the end condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in blue waves (see Figure 107 (B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 was met, the 2-part accident prevention display 004SG322 of the fourth scene begins to fade out (switch display) by gradually turning black and blending into the black caution background display 004SG321 (see Figure 107(C)). Then, the display screen turns black, and the first background display 004SG081 and decorative design begin to be displayed. At the same time, the menu guide display 004SG401 frames in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see Figure 107(D)). It then moves to the right to the specified position and is animated, at which point the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 appears in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 107(E)).

In other words, when termination condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while also beginning switching control to switch the display content from a demo movie display to a normal background display including a fade-out display (switching display). However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the normal background begins after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E1 was met (see Figures 107 (C) and 108).

In more detail, when termination condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying normal background display. In response, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving extension command: B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to normal background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display begins after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern begins after the predetermined period tg and the switch display period have elapsed. Therefore, from the outside, the lighting control for the normal background of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the normal background display begins. This gradual design prevents the demo display from ending with a bad feeling, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period has ended following the end of the variable display in the low base state, and controls them using a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) during the first customer waiting period after the end of the second customer waiting period in the high base state, switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, and switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the first background display 004SG081.

In this way, the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the background display begins. This gradual design prevents the end of the demo movie display from leaving a bad feeling. Furthermore, the state of the lamps can be quickly notified to the player, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the satisfaction of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 begin to be displayed a predetermined time after the display switches from background to demo movie display. On the other hand, when the demo movie display ends based on the satisfaction of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 begin to be displayed when the display switches from demo movie display to background display.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo effect ends over time when the gaming state is in a high base state will be explained based on Figures 107 and 109.

As shown in Figures 107 and 109, in the high base state, if the first demo movie display, which was initiated when one of start conditions S1 to S5 was met, ends when end condition E1 is met, i.e., 55 seconds have passed since the demo movie display began, the system transitions to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). If 30 seconds, the sixth hour, has passed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), start condition S6 is deemed to be met, and the demo movie display begins again. From then on, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until end conditions E2 to E4 for the demo movie display end.

In more detail, as shown in Figure 107 (A), when the second part of the warning message for the fourth and final scene of the demo movie is displayed, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a white-based illumination pattern based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e lights up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights up white).

Then, when the end condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in purple (or green) waves (see Figure 107 (B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was met, the 2-part accident prevention display 004SG322 of the fourth scene begins to fade out (switch) by gradually turning black and blending into the black caution background display 004SG321 (see FIG. 107(C)). The display screen then turns black, after which the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative design begin to be displayed. The menu guide display 004SG401 frames in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 107(D)). It then moves to the right to the specified position as an animation, and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 appears in the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 107(E)).

In other words, when termination condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and begins illumination control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e). At the same time, it begins switching control to switch the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) including a fade-out display (switching display) and a decorative pattern background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the high B music background begins after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E1 was met (see Figures 107 (C) and 109).

More specifically, when termination condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the background display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. In response, the display control unit 123 sends the performance control CPU 120 an extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the background display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. Upon receiving the extension command: B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the background display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. Meanwhile, after transmitting the extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display begins after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern begins after the predetermined period tg and the switch display period have elapsed. Therefore, it appears that lighting control of the high-B music background of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the high-B background display is started. This gradual design prevents the demo display from ending with a bad feeling, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period has ended following the end of the variable display in the high base state, and controls them using a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period after the end of the second customer waiting period in the high base state, and controls the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082). Before the display is switched from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and before the display is switched from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)).

In this way, the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the background display begins. This gradual design prevents the end of the demo movie display from leaving a bad feeling. Furthermore, the state of the lamps can be quickly notified to the player, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the satisfaction of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 begin to be displayed a predetermined time after the display switches from background to demo movie display. On the other hand, when the demo movie display ends based on the satisfaction of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 begin to be displayed when the display switches from demo movie display to background display.

(End of customer waiting demo performance. Start winning version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends with a start winning will be explained based on Figures 110 to 115. Figures 110 (A) to (E) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends with a start winning in a low base state. Figures 111 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the display mode of Figure 110. Figure 112 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a low base state. Figure 113 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a low base state. Figure 114 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a high base state. Figure 115 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with the first start winning when the gaming state is in a low base state will be explained based on Figures 110 to 112.

As shown in Figures 110 to 112, in a low base state, if the demo movie display, which was initiated by the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S6, ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E2, i.e., the occurrence of the first start winning (the start of the variable display of the first special symbol) during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbol begins.

In more detail, as shown in Figure 110 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, if the first start win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the introductory part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) will be switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) will begin to light up in blue waves (see Figure 110 (B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has passed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative symbols will begin, and the variable display of the decorative symbols will begin (see Figures 110 (C) to (E)).

In other words, when termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while also beginning switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background (variable display) display and variable display of decorative patterns; however, the normal background display and variable display of decorative patterns begin at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after termination condition E2 is met (see Figures 110 (C) and 112).

More specifically, when termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying normal background display and variable decorative symbol display. In response, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display and variable decorative symbol display to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving extension command: B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to normal background display and variable decorative symbol display. Meanwhile, after sending extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display and variable decorative symbol display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to normal background display and variable decorative symbol display after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, as shown in Figure 111 (A), when the first start winning occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the introduction part 1 of the second scene is being displayed in the demo movie display, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in blue waves, while the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of small symbols begins until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 111 (B)).

Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was met, the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern begin to be displayed, and the first reserved display 004SG101 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U, followed by a shift display in which the first reserved display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F (see Figures 111 (C) and (D)).

In addition, as shown in Figures 111(C) to 111(E), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C do not begin scrolling and remain temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the first reserved display 004SG101 displayed in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F, that is, until the shift display of the reserved display is completed, and each character performs a change start action. Change start actions include, for example, characters displayed in the character display area 004SG052 moving their face or body or changing their facial expressions on the pedestal display area 004SG054 in a manner different from scrolling display.

Then, when the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C begin scrolling in the order of left, right, and center (see Figure 109 (F)). When the scrolling display begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and a fade-out display begins, with the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increasing in proportion to the increase in display speed, reaching nearly 90% at high speeds (see Figure 109 (G) and Figure 112). Note that in the low base state (first presentation mode), the appearance shown in Figure 111 will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol begins.

As a result, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of the decorative patterns begin a predetermined period of time th after the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched. Therefore, it appears that the lighting control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the scrolling display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative patterns.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the customer that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, making it easier for players to see changes in the light emission pattern, allowing them to quickly notify the player that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

In addition, as shown in Figure 113, the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins due to an irregular win or the like in a low base state is the same as the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state as shown in Figure 112, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with the second start winning when the game state is in a high base state will be explained based on Figure 114, with reference to Figures 110 and 181.

As shown in Figure 114, in the high base state, if the demo movie display that started when one of start conditions S1 to S6 was met ends when end condition E2 is met, that is, when a second start win (start of variable display of second special symbol) occurs during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of decorative symbols begins.

In more detail, as shown in Figure 110 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, if the second start win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the introductory part 1 of the second scene is being displayed in the demo movie display, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) will be switched to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will begin to light up in purple (or green) waves (see Figure 110(B). In Figure 110(B), blue waves are lit). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols will begin, and the variable display of the decorative symbols will begin (see Figures 110(C) to (E)).

In other words, when termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e). At the same time, it begins switching control to switch the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols; however, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols begin at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after termination condition E2 is met (see FIG. 110 (C)).

More specifically, when termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the variable display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols. In response, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the variable display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extension command: B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols. On the other hand, after the display control unit 123 sends the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern, after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed, it switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 181(A), when the second start winning occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the introduction part 1 of the second scene is being displayed in the demo movie display, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in purple (or green) waves, while the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of small symbols begins until the predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met (see FIG. 181(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern begins, and the second reserved display 004SG102 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U, followed by a shift display in which the second reserved display 004SG102 moves to the active display area 5F (see Figure 181 (C)).

In addition, as shown in Figures 181(C) to 181(D), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C will remain temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C and will not begin scrolling until the second reserved display 004SG102 displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F, that is, the shift display of the reserved display is completed; however, in the high base state, the change start action of each character is not executed (see Figure 82(B)).

Once the pending display shift display is complete, the decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C will begin scrolling simultaneously on all sides, left, right, and center (see Figure 181 (E)). When the scrolling display begins, the scrolling display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the fade-out display begins, with the image transmittance (transparency) gradually increasing in proportion to the increase in display speed, reaching nearly 90% at high speeds (see Figures 181 (F) and (G)).

In addition, in the high base state (second presentation mode, third presentation mode), the appearance shown in Figure 181 will occur regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol begins.

Therefore, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the scrolling display of decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period of time th has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) changed. Therefore, it appears that lighting control for the high B background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and changes to the scrolling display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative patterns.

In other words, if the first start condition is met when a demo movie display is being displayed in a low base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state; and if the second start condition is met when a demo movie display is being displayed in a high base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state.

In this way, by switching control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first in the high base state, the switching of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the customer that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, by switching control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first in the low base state and high base state, the switching of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify that the first or second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, making it easier for players to see changes in the light emission pattern, allowing them to quickly be notified that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 115, the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or the like in a high base state is the same as the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state as shown in Figure 114, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, if a first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) by switching them from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol, and if a second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, by switching them from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol.

In this way, regardless of which start winning event occurs, by switching control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the user that a start winning event has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a scrolling display of the decorative pattern so that the transparency of the decorative pattern changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%) higher than the first value, and if a first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of the decorative pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to notify customers that a starting win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if the first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a scrolling display of the decorative pattern so that the transparency of the decorative pattern changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%) higher than the first value; if the first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed in a low base state, the display switches from the demo movie display to a variable display of the decorative pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%; and if the first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed in a high base state, the display switches from the demo movie display to a variable display of the decorative pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to notify the customer that the first or second start win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, even if the variable display of small symbols begins following the occurrence of a first or second start winning, the transparency will not change while the decorative symbols are performing a variable start action, so the demo movie display will switch to a background display for the variable display of the decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from the first value.

In addition, if a first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, and if a second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, whether the first or second starting win occurs, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern increases, it is possible to notify customers that a starting win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demo. Steering wheel operation version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo effect ends with steering operation will be described with reference to Figures 116 and 117. Figures 116 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends with steering operation in a low base state. Figure 117 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with steering operation in a low base state.

<Low base state>
An example of operation when the customer waiting demo effect is ended by handle operation when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 116 and 117. Note that, in the following, an example of operation when the customer waiting demo effect is ended by handle operation when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described, but an example of operation when the customer waiting demo effect is ended by handle operation when the gaming state is in a high base state will not be described here because the example of operation is almost the same except that the background display and lamp data are changed to those for a high base.

As shown in Figures 116 and 117, in the low base state, if the demo movie display, which was started when one of the start conditions S1 to S6 was met, is ended when the end condition E3 is met, i.e., based on steering wheel operation, the demo movie display ends and the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern begin to be displayed.

In more detail, as shown in Figure 116 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, if steering wheel operation is detected while the first introductory part of the second scene in the demo movie is being displayed and termination condition E3 is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in blue waves (see Figure 116 (B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E3 was met, the first background display 004SG081 and decorative design begin to be displayed, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen and animated as it moves to the right to the specified position, and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 116 (C)).

In other words, when termination condition E3 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while also beginning switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background (stopped pattern) display, with the normal background display and decorative pattern not beginning until at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E3 was met (see Figures 116 (C) and 117).

More specifically, when termination condition E3 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying normal background display. In response, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command B10E corresponding to normal background display to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving extension command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending extension command B10E corresponding to normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to normal background display after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

As a result, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins after a predetermined period of time th has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched. Therefore, it appears that the lighting control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has begun before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern, and the guide display.

In other words, if the operation of the ball-hitting control handle 30 is detected while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display.

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly indicate that the ball-hitting operation handle 30 has been operated and that the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, making it easier for players to see changes in the light emission pattern, allowing them to quickly notify the player that the end condition E3 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

(End of customer waiting demo performance. Menu operation version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo effect is ended by menu operation will be explained based on Figures 118 to 119. Figures 118 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in a low base state. Figure 119 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in a low base state. Figure 120 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in a high base state.

<Low base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with an operation to open the menu display when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 118 to 120.

As shown in Figures 118 and 119, in the low base state, if the demo movie display, which was started when one of start conditions S1 to S6 was satisfied, is ended when end condition E4 is satisfied, i.e., based on an operation to open menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter also referred to as a menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the first background display 004SG081 and decorative design begin to be displayed, with menu display 004SG410 displayed in front of them. Note that the operation to open menu display 004SG410 is assumed to be an operation of push button 31B while menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but other operations such as stick controller 31A may also be used.

In more detail, as shown in Figure 118 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, if a menu operation is detected while the first introductory part of the second scene in the demo movie is being displayed and termination condition E4 is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in blue waves (see Figure 118 (B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E4 was met, the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern begin to be displayed, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 118 (C)).

In other words, when termination condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while also beginning switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background and menu display 004SG410, with the normal background display and menu display 004SG410 beginning at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after termination condition E4 is met (see Figures 118 (C) and 119).

More specifically, when termination condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying normal background and menu display 004SG410. In response, the display control unit 123 sends extension command B10E corresponding to normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving extension command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to normal background and menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, after sending extension command B10E corresponding to normal background and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to normal background and menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

As a result, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period of time th has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) was switched. Therefore, it appears that lighting control for the normal background of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative pattern, and menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the performance control CPU 120 detects an operation to display menu display 004SG410 using push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, it switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display and menu guide display 004SG401.

In this way, by switching control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify customers that the demo movie display has ended due to the push button 31B being operated to display menu guide display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, making it easier for players to see changes in the light emission pattern, allowing them to quickly notify the player that the end condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

<High base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with an operation to open the menu display when the gaming state is in a high base state will be described with reference to Figures 118 and 120.

As shown in Figures 118 and 120, in the high base state, if the demo movie display, which was started when one of start conditions S1 to S6 was satisfied, is ended when end condition E4 is satisfied, i.e., based on the operation of opening menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter also referred to as menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of third background display 004SG083 (shown as first background display 004SG081 in Figure 118) and decorative patterns begins, with menu display 004SG410 displayed in front of them. Note that the operation to open menu display 004SG410 is performed by operating push button 31B while menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but other operations such as stick controller 31A may also be used.

In more detail, as shown in Figure 118 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when a menu operation is detected and termination condition E4 is met while the first introductory part of the second scene is being displayed in the demo movie display, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in purple (or green) waves (blue in Figure 118 (B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E4 was met, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative design begin to be displayed, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 118 (C)).

In other words, when termination condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and begins illumination control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e). At the same time, it begins switching control of the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082), but the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410 begin at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after termination condition E4 is met (see Figures 118 (C) and 120).

In detail, when the termination condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120, and upon receiving the extension command: B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, after sending the extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period of time th has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) changed. Therefore, it appears that lighting control for the high B background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and changes to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the performance control CPU 120 detects an operation to display menu display 004SG410 using push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, it switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410.

In this way, by switching control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify customers that the demo movie display has ended due to the push button 31B being operated to display menu guide display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, making it easier for players to see changes in the light emission pattern, allowing them to quickly notify the player that the end condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which a high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is applied as the menu brightness data table for the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a brightness data table with a different light emission pattern from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) may also be set as the menu brightness data table.

(End of customer waiting demo performance when interrupt conditions are met)
In this embodiment, when an interrupt condition is met while displaying a demo movie display, that is, when any of termination condition 2 (start-up winning), termination condition 3 (steering wheel operation), and termination condition E4 (menu operation) is met, or when termination condition E1 (time elapses) is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the demo movie display to the normal background display or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display.

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing to have been a sudden change by inserting a switching display, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interruption condition is made to appear to have been a sudden change without an interrupting switching display. By contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the fact that the display ended due to an interruption, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the demo movie display is being displayed in the low base state, if an interruption condition is met, that is, if any of end condition E2 (start-up winning), end condition E3 (steering wheel operation), or end condition E4 (menu operation), or if end condition E1 (time lapse) is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the demo movie display to the normal background display without displaying a fade-out display or the like that would be displayed as a switching display if that condition is met; and when the demo movie display is being displayed in the high base state, if an interruption condition is met, that is, if any of end condition E2 (start-up winning), end condition E3 (steering wheel operation), or end condition E4 (menu operation), or if end condition E1 (time lapse) is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out display or the like that would be displayed as a switching display if that condition is met.

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing to have been a sudden change by inserting a switching display, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interruption condition is made to appear to have been a sudden change without an interrupting switching display. By contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the fact that the display ended due to an interruption, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an interrupt condition is met while the demo movie display is being displayed, that is, when any of end conditions E2 (start win), E3 (steering wheel operation), E4 (menu operation) is met, or when end condition E1 (time elapses) is met, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) from the demo movie display without displaying a fade-out display or the like that would be displayed as a switching display when the demo movie display is being displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when any of end conditions E2 to E4 is met while the demo movie display is being displayed, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as a background display without displaying a switching display.

(End of customer waiting demo. Error occurred.)
Next, a case where an error occurs in the customer waiting demo effect will be explained with reference to Figs. 121 to 124. Fig. 121 (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device following a win, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device following a win. Fig. 122 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a bulb out error occurs in the customer waiting demo effect. Fig. 123 is a diagram for explaining priority layers. Fig. 124 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo effect started in a low base state. Fig. 125 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo effect started in a high base state.

First, we will explain one type of error, the ball out error. The ball out error occurs when the payout control unit operates the payout device 004SG031, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(A), when the conditions for paying out prize balls are met due to the occurrence of a win or other reason, the payout device 004SG031 performs a payout operation (e.g., rotating a sprocket (not shown)) to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five), and the game balls are paid out into the payout passage. If all five game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the payout operation begins, the CPU 103 determines that the payout was successful and terminates the payout process. Therefore, the display screen of the image display device 5 does not display an error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 122(B)), which consists of a mark and the text "Ball Out Error," and the main lamp 9a does not flash an error, as described below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), when a payout operation (e.g., rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed by the payout device 004SG031 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five) in response to a winning win, the CPU 103 determines whether the period during which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 has not detected any game balls continues for a first determination period tl (e.g., tl = 5 seconds) while there are unpaid balls (e.g., three of the five game balls have not been detected). If it determines that no game balls have been detected within this first determination period tl, that is, that the period during which no game balls have been detected while there are unpaid balls continues for the first determination period tl, the CPU 103 determines that the payout was not performed normally, and continues to perform a payout operation to pay out five game balls and a retry operation to repeatedly perform a game ball detection determination within the first determination period tl until the number of unpaid balls (e.g., five) is detected.

If five game balls have not been detected even after the third retry operation has ended during this retry operation period, that is, if the period during which no game balls have been detected while there are unpaid balls continues for the second judgment period tm (e.g., 15 seconds, including the first judgment period tl), the CPU 103 will determine that there may be a malfunction such as an insufficient supply of game balls to the payout device 004SG031, a malfunction of the payout device 004SG031, or balls clogging the payout passage, and will send an error designation command indicating that a ball out error has occurred and continue the retry operation.

Meanwhile, upon receiving the error designation command, the performance control CPU 120 switches the main lamp 9a to flashing red to indicate an error, while maintaining the previous light emission control of the board lamp and side lamp 9b. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (e.g., tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error designation command, the display screen displays error display 004SG700 (see Figure 122 (B)) to indicate an error.

Furthermore, after sending an error designation command indicating a ball out error, when the first game ball is detected through a retry operation, the CPU 103 sends an error designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 specifying that the ball out error has been cleared. In other words, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, the error designation command specifying the clearing of the ball out error is sent when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the first judgment period tl or the second judgment period tm has elapsed since the first game ball was detected through a retry operation. This allows the error notification to be terminated quickly without waiting until all unpaid balls have been detected. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (e.g., tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the error clear designation command was received, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen and the error notification is terminated.

Furthermore, if there are still unpaid balls remaining after an error designation command specifying that the error should be cleared is sent, a retry operation will be initiated again, and if the number of unpaid game balls is not detected even after the third retry operation has been resumed, another error designation command specifying a ball shortage error will be sent, and the performance control CPU 120 will resume the error notification described above.

<Low base state>
Next, an example of operation when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the first special pattern that is started in a low base state and continues even after the demo movie display has started will be explained based on Figures 122 to 124.

As shown in Figures 122 to 124, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see Figure 122 (A)). Additionally, the board lamp and frame lamp begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e remains lit in white based on the default brightness data table.

Next, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an error specification command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), but for the main lamp 9a, as shown in Figure 123, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a in the priority layer (see Figure 122 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 123, the normal layer is basically set with a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp depending on the state, while the priority layer, which takes priority over the normal layer, is set with an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. The error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is then used in preference to the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background normal, etc.), and brightness data is output to the LED driver, causing the main lamp 9a to flash red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the timing of the light emission control time using the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background normal, etc.).

Next, as shown in Figure 122 (C), when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the error message 004SG700 will be displayed on the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen.

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are statically displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in frame from the bottom left side of the display screen, and when it moves to the right to the specified position as an animation, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 122 (D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the board lamp and side lamp 9b is switched to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white begins. Note that even after the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red (see Figure 122 (E)). Thereafter, the demo movie display starts when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 122 (F)).

After that, when the bulb failure error is cleared at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer, and light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display also begins for the main lamp 9a (see Figure 122 (G)). At this time, because light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) can be started midway through the demo movie display from a predetermined point. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error was cleared, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see Figure 122 (G)).

In addition, although not shown in detail, the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol initiated by an irregular win or the like in a low base state and continues even after the demo movie display has begun is the same as the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol initiated in a low base state and continues even after the demo movie display has begun, as shown in Figure 122, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during variable display, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error, and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by continuing to use the lamp to notify specific errors that occur during gameplay (for example, a bulb failure error) whether the background is being displayed or a demo movie is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of bulb failure errors, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by continuing to use the lamp to notify of specific errors that occur during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, even during background display and demo movie display, it is possible to provide stable notification of bulb-out errors, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

<High base state>
Next, an example of operation when a bulb failure error that occurs during the variable display of the second special pattern that is started in a high base state continues even after the demo movie display has started will be explained based on Figure 125 and with reference to Figure 122.

As shown in Figure 125, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in the high base state, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (see Figure 122 (A)). Additionally, the board lamp and frame lamp begin to light up in purple (or green) waves based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e remains lit in white based on the default brightness data table.

Next, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an error specification command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), while for the main lamp 9a, as shown in Figure 123, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a in the priority layer (see Figure 122 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 123, the normal layer is basically configured with a high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp depending on the state, while the priority layer, which takes priority over the normal layer, is configured with an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. The error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is then used in preference to the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), etc.) to output brightness data to the LED driver, causing the main lamp 9a to flash red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the timing of the light emission control time using the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), etc.).

Next, when a bulb failure error occurs and the main lamp 9a switches to flashing red, and a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed, the error message 004SG700 will be displayed in the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen (see Figure 122 (C)).

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative symbols are statically displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in frame from the bottom left side of the display screen, and when it moves to the right to the specified position and is displayed as an animation, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 122 (D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the board lamp and side lamp 9b is switched to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white begins. Note that even after the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red (see Figure 122 (E)). Thereafter, the demo movie display starts when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 122 (F)).

After that, when the bulb failure error is cleared at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer, and light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display also begins for the main lamp 9a (see Figure 122 (G)). At this time, because light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) can be started midway through the demo movie display from a predetermined point. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error was cleared, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see Figure 122 (G)).

In addition, although not shown in detail, the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol initiated by an irregular win or the like in a high base state and continues even after the demo movie display has begun is the same as the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol initiated in a high base state and continues even after the demo movie display has begun, as shown in Figure 125, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error, and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error); if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state, it controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error, and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by continuing to issue lamp notifications for bulb failure errors that occur during variable display in both low and high base modes, even during background display and demo movie display, stable bulb failure error notifications can be issued, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by continuing to use the lamp to notify of specific errors that occur during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, even during background display and demo movie display, it is possible to provide stable notification of bulb-out errors, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the color that accounts for the majority of the brightness data that makes up the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is different from the color that accounts for the majority of the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the color that accounts for the majority of the brightness data that makes up the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is white, while the color that accounts for the majority of the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demos) to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the lighting pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different colors that make up a larger proportion. Specifically, the color that makes up a larger proportion of the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is blue, while the color that makes up a larger proportion of the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) differ in the color that accounts for a large proportion of the data, and the brightness data that makes up the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) differ in the color that accounts for a large proportion of the data. Specifically, the color that accounts for a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is blue, while the color that accounts for a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 92). Additionally, the colors that make up a large proportion of the brightness data that make up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) are green (for time reduction) or purple (for probability change), while the color that makes up a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the lighting pattern during background display, regardless of which background is being displayed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: guaranteed background change), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority of the color range differ between the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the lighting pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur while the background is displayed, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable), and if a bulb failure error occurs while the background is displayed, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority of the colors differ between the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: variable background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the lighting pattern during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, when an error is notified, red flashing light emission control is performed based on an error brightness data table set in the priority layer. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When an error is notified, light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error brightness data (grandchild data) that causes a lamp dedicated to error notification to flash red.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an error is notified, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control the light emission for error notification. However, since the error lamp is illuminated to attract the attention of gaming facility staff, the main lamp 9a is placed at the highest point of the frame lamp where it will not be hidden by the player and is therefore the easiest for gaming facility staff to notice, but a side lamp 9b or other lamps may also be used.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal); if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error); if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in a low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo); if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in a low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error); and if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display in a high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background constant variable (or lamp data table: background time shortened)). and controls the side lamp 9b and the panel lamp; if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in a high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error); if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo); if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error); the colors that make up the majority of the data are different between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error); and the colors that make up the majority of the data are different between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), it is possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the lighting pattern during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the brightness data constituting the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player differs. Specifically, the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) has a white-based light emission behavior, while the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur while the background is being displayed, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable), and if a bulb failure error occurs while the background is being displayed, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the light-emitting operation patterns of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) visually perceived by the player are configured to differ between the brightness data constituting the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) lights up in blue waves, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) lights up in purple (or green) waves, and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: variable background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different lighting behaviors for the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) seen by the player, and the brightness data constituting the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different lighting behaviors for the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) seen by the player. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) lights up in blue waves, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) lights up in purple (or green) waves, and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 92).

In this way, the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)).This makes it possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in a low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in a low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display in a high base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background constant variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in a high base state In this case, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has ended, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emitting operation modes of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) seen by the player differ, and the brightness data constituting the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emitting operation modes of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) seen by the player differ. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) lights up in blue waves, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) lights up in purple (or green) waves, and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 92).

In this way, the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)).This makes it possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data table for the error (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light-emitting operation modes of the main lamp 9a and the board lamps and side lamps 9b that are visually recognized by the player are different. Specifically, in the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) light up in a white-based light-emitting mode, while in the brightness data table for the error (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamps and side lamps 9b light up in a mode appropriate to the state (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the lighting pattern during the demo movie display can indicate that an error has occurred, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: variable background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light-emitting operation modes of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b visually recognized by the player differ. Specifically, with the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: variable background), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in blue waves, green waves, or purple waves, while with the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a mode appropriate to the state (see Figure 92).

In this way, by configuring the behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: variable background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in a low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in a low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display in a high base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background constant variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and if a bulb failure error occurs ... If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has ended, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the light emitting operation modes of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player differ between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the light emitting operation modes of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player differ between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, with a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave, with a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), they light up in a purple (or green) wave, and with an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a manner appropriate to the status (see Figure 92).

In this way, the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). This makes it possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The light-emitting operation modes mentioned above are light-emitting modes that allow the player to see some kind of movement, and include, for example, flashing (alternating between turning on and off) and flickering (hazy) modes with changes in brightness (such as changing from RGB:700 to RGB:400). Light-emitting operation modes do not include turning on or off without a change in brightness. For example, in the case of flickering (hazy), the specific light-emitting means would be set to the first brightness (RGB is 100) for the first brightness data x ms (or the combination of the brightness of the first, second, and third colors would be the first combination), and the specific light-emitting means would be set to the second brightness (RGB is A00) for the second brightness data y ms (or the combination of the brightness of the first, second, and third colors would be the second combination), etc. It is preferable that the brightness of the specific light-emitting means differ from the previous brightness data, assuming that the second brightness data is used after the first brightness data.

In addition, if the conditions for game ball payout are met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, and unpaid game balls occur, a ball out error occurs. When a ball out error occurs during the second customer waiting period, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and controls the panel lamp and frame lamp at the timing related to the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detecting the first (first) game ball dispensed, regardless of whether the number of game balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout unit) exceeds the number of game balls to be dispensed, or the number of game balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031 does not exceed the number of game balls to be dispensed.

In this way, regardless of the number of gaming balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp can be switched to a lighting mode corresponding to the demo movie display when the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first gaming ball, allowing the demo movie display to appear natural and standardizing the process, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if the conditions for game ball payout are met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, and unpaid game balls occur, a ball out error occurs. When a ball out error occurs during the first customer waiting period, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) and controls the board lamp and frame lamp at the timing related to the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detecting the first (first) game ball dispensed, regardless of whether the number of game balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout unit) exceeds the number of unpaid game balls, or the number of game balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031 does not exceed the number of unpaid game balls.

In this way, regardless of the number of gaming balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is switched to a lighting mode corresponding to the background display when the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first gaming ball, allowing the background display to look natural and processing to be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, during the second customer waiting period, if the conditions for dispensing gaming balls are met and the period during which the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a gaming ball continues for the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl), the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the error (lamp data table: error) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp; and when a bulb-out error occurs during the second customer waiting period, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected a gaming ball, the brightness data table for the error (lamp data table: error) is switched to the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, when the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detecting a ball, this could be a bulb blown error, but there is also the possibility of a delayed ball, etc., so the lighting mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is not immediately switched. Instead, when a gaming ball is detected, the lighting mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to a lighting mode that corresponds to the demo movie display, allowing the demo movie display to appear natural, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, during the first customer waiting period, if the conditions for dispensing a gaming ball are met and the period during which the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a gaming ball continues for the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl), the panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and when a bulb-out error occurs during the first customer waiting period, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected a gaming ball, the panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable).

In this way, when the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detecting a ball, this could be a bulb blown error, but there is also the possibility of a delayed ball, etc., so the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is not immediately switched. Instead, when a gaming ball is detected, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to a lighting mode that corresponds to the background display, allowing the background display to appear natural, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 outputs brightness data to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing one or more of the LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Hereinafter, the control of turning on, blinking, or extinguishing lamps such as LEDs by the effect control CPU 120 is also referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on, blink, or extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a lamp data table containing brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table used during a super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Furthermore, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table used in the normal state (normal background shown in FIG. 134), a fanfare background lamp data table used in the fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background lamp data table used during a round in the jackpot gaming state, an ending background lamp data table used in the ending state in which an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, a probability variable background lamp data table used in the probability variable state (probable variable background shown in FIG. 134), a time-saving background lamp data table used in the time-saving state (time-saving background shown in FIG. 134), and a customer waiting lamp data table used in the customer waiting state (customer waiting demo shown in FIG. 134).

The above-mentioned background lamp data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background lamp data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states the game is controlled to, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, probability variable state, time-saving state, and waiting state. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background lamp data table to the LED driver. This allows each game effect lamp 9 to be controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error lamp data table, SP reach lamp data table, and background lamp data table when they are used. Specifically, as shown in Figure 126, the priority is highest in the error lamp data table, followed by the SP reach lamp data table and then the background lamp data table.

For example, if the effect control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in a normal state and the effect develops into a Super Reach effect, it uses the SP Reach lamp data table corresponding to the Super Reach effect in preference to the normal background lamp data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the SP Reach lamp data table. As a result, if the effect develops into a Super Reach effect when the game effect lamps 9 are being controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table, the game effect lamps 9 that do not have brightness data set based on the SP Reach lamp data table are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table, but the game effect lamps 9 that have brightness data set based on the SP Reach lamp data table are controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach effect based on the SP Reach lamp data table. Furthermore, during the period when brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is being output to the LED driver, for lamps for which brightness data is set based on the SP Reach lamp data table, brightness data based on the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver, and when the normal state is restored after the Super Reach performance ends, brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver. Also, after the Super Reach performance ends, if a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered, brightness data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and all lamps are controlled in a manner based on the fanfare background lamp data table.

More specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, while outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the background lamp data table corresponding to that game state being controlled. However, if the effect progresses to a Super Reach effect, the SP Reach lamp data table corresponding to that Super Reach effect is used preferentially over the background lamp data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background lamp data table. In other words, even while the presentation control CPU 120 is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP Reach lamp data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP Reach lamp data table, the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. Then, after the Super Reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 resumes outputting the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table to the LED driver, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that it had been updating. Note that for game effect lamps 9 that do not have brightness data set based on the SP Reach lamp data table, the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver.

Furthermore, for example, if an error occurs while the effect control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in a normal state or while outputting brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table during a super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table are not set are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table, but for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table are set, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is used in preference to the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table, and brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table, but for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table are set, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table. Furthermore, for lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set while brightness data based on the error lamp data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or SP reach lamp data table is not output to the LED driver; when the error is cleared and the game returns to normal mode or a gaming mode during a super reach effect, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or SP reach lamp data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the time for lamp control corresponding to the normal state or the lamp control corresponding to the Super Reach effect currently being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the normal background lamp data table corresponding to the normal state or the SP Reach lamp data table corresponding to the Super Reach effect. However, if an error occurs, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is used in preference to the background lamp data table or the SP Reach lamp data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background lamp data table or the SP Reach lamp data table. In other words, even while controlling the game effect lamps 9 based on the error lamp data table, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table have lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error lamp data table, the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the effect control CPU 120 resumes outputting the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver, continuing from the brightness data that it was updating. Note that for game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set, the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver.

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, the lamps of each game effect lamp 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off,""almostoff,""on," and "flashing" are used to describe the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As described above, the "on" and "flashing" modes of each game effect lamp 9 are also referred to as "lighting modes."

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and its brightness is 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" as described below).

For example, if the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as brightness data is "000," the corresponding LED will be "off." Also, if the brightness data (RGB data) is "111," the corresponding LED will be lit in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED when its RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lit" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting, in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lit" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

The term "flashing" refers to a state of the game effect lamp 9 other than the above-mentioned "off" and "on" states, including states in which the brightness of each lamp alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "flashing" includes repeatedly turning on and off or nearly off, and specifically, "flashing" includes alternating over time between brightness data of "2" to "F" and brightness data of "0" or "1." As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the lamp lighting state includes hazy lighting. However, while hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness, flashing differs from hazy lighting in that all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 alternate between turning on and off or nearly off.

[Explanation about the game effect lamp]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 127 to 133.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data tables]
The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation uses a lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time in accordance with the variation pattern command sent from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one every frame (33 ms) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying each part, the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extension command (for example, extension command BXXX (where "X" is any value (0-F)) corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the display control it is performing, and sends the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is being performed by the display control unit 123.

Figure 127 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in Figure 127, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs a specified display control, it sends an extension command (BXXX) to specify the display control to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the specified display control.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (lit or unlit) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table to be referenced during lamp control for the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table only stores information about lamps subject to lamp control; it does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 129, side lamp 9b is specified as the target for lamp control. Furthermore, child table XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified corresponding to side lamp 9, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table. Furthermore, for game effect lamps 9 for which no corresponding information is stored in the parent table (in Figure 129, main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information last set in the parent table will continue.

As shown in FIG. 127, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a lamp specified in a parent table using a specified child table, for example, if 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time, it decrements the counter by 1 every 10 ms to time 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 times 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter decrement process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until it has timed a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes). Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extended command after receiving an extended command but before it has timed a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes), it will stop the lamp control in progress and perform lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified in the newly received extended command. Although it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control using the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). Therefore, even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it is possible to continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the subject of lamp control, information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is performed. Note that the child table only stores information about lamps that are the subject of lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not the subject of lamp control.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 130, corresponding to side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_1 and this grandchild table: 500 ms, execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 and this grandchild table: 500 ms, execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, and execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 and this grandchild table: 600,000 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed. Furthermore, for the game effect lamps 9 in the child table for which corresponding information is not stored (in Figure 130, the main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control will continue based on the information last set in the child table.

As shown in Figure 127, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it first controls the target lamp using the grandchild table specified, times the execution time corresponding to that grandchild table, and then controls the target lamp using the next grandchild table specified, repeating this process for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 130, for side lamp 9b, first, lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until 500 ms is reached, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 500 ms is reached, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is reached, and then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600,000 ms is reached. It is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, but by setting the maximum lamp control time using the last specified grandchild table to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the performance display (performance scene), it is possible to continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason.

Furthermore, in the child table, when the side lamp 9b is the target of lamp control, for example, one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1, as shown in FIG. 131, may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1, not shown, may be specified. When one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the performance control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified as the grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to perform lamp control for the left side lamp 9b, and the other grandchild table to perform lamp control for the right side lamp 9b. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, common lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, whereas when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b.

The grandchild table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, brightness data that is referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is performed. Note that the grandchild table only stores information about lamps that are the subject of lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not the subject of lamp control.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 131, corresponding to side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1), the following data is displayed: brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, The order in which lamp control is performed using this brightness data is specified as follows: 0x000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms. Note that for game effect lamps 9 that do not have corresponding information stored in the grandchild table (in Figure 131, this includes the main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attack lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information from the most recently set grandchild table continues.

In the brightness data of the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) in the grandchild tables shown in Figures 129 to 131, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lowest 1 to 3 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of each side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 4 to 6 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of each side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1 to 3 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top of each side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 4 to 6 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top of each side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1 to 3 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top of each side lamp 9b, and the values of the lowest 1 to 3 digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11 indicate the RGB values of the eleventh lamp from the top of each side lamp 9b.

Also, although not specifically shown, when different grandchild tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, in the brightness data for the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the left The values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the left side lamp 9b. In the brightness data of the right-side side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_2_~), the values of the last four to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the values of the last one to three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the values of the last four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the values of the last one to three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, and the values of the last four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b. The values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top on the right-side side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top on the right-side side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top on the right-side side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top on the right-side side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top on the right-side side lamp 9b, and the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the eleventh lamp from the top on the right-side side lamp 9b.

Although not specifically shown, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LMAIN_~) specifying the main lamp 9a, the values in the lowest three digits indicate the RGB values of the main lamp 9a. In the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LLOGO_~) specifying the movable body lamp 9d, the values in the lowest four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, the values in the lowest four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, the values in the lowest four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, and the values in the lowest four to three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d. In addition, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 5 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. In addition, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LATAK_~) specifying the attacca lamp 9c, the values in the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c, the values in the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c, the values in the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the third lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c, and the values in the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c. In addition, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LPUSH_~) specifying the button lamp 9e, the values in the first to third lowest digits indicate the RGB values of the button lamp 9e.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp being controlled. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements: "R," "G," and "B." The brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values ranging from 0 to F. When brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum (e.g., 0), and when brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum. For example, when brightness data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element. When brightness data of "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element. When brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by passing current corresponding to brightness data through each RGB element. Furthermore, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can light up in colors corresponding to each performance or character by emitting light based on brightness data. As an example, when brightness data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED and a current corresponding to that data flows, the LED lights up red. Furthermore, when brightness data "F0F" is output from an LED lamp to an LED and a current corresponding to that data flows, the LED lights up magenta. Furthermore, when brightness data "FF0" is output from an LED lamp to an LED and a current corresponding to that data flows, the LED lights up yellow.

As shown in Figure 127, when the performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, it performs the process of, for example, first outputting the specified brightness data to the LED driver, timing the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputting the next specified brightness data to the LED driver, in the specified order for all specified brightness data. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 130, for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver until 100 ms is first counted, and then the following brightness data is output to the LED driver until 120 ms is counted: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 The CPU 120 outputs 0x000 to the LED driver, then outputs the following brightness data to the LED driver until 120 ms is reached: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, and then outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, 0x5AA until 40 ms is reached. The LED driver then passes a current corresponding to the received brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and controls the lamps based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table by decrementing the timers at regular intervals (e.g., every 10 ms).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in that grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in that grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on a grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

Referring to the figure, timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained. Figure 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 128, in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, 500 ms is specified as the time for the first lamp control for side lamp 9b, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 is specified. 500 ms is specified as the time for the second lamp control, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. 230 ms is specified as the time for the third lamp control, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 is specified. 600,000 ms is specified as the time for the fourth lamp control, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, the luminance data (RGB data) for the side lamp 9b is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499", 0x499" at 100 ms intervals. For ease of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms as data 4.

When controlling lamps for the second-specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, the performance control CPU 120 counts the specified 500 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until the count reaches 500 ms. However, if the count has not yet reached 500 ms after outputting data 1 through data 4, the brightness data will again be output to the LED driver in order, starting with data 1. When the count reaches 500 ms, the performance control CPU 120 will stop outputting brightness data based on grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 and begin outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 specified by the child table.

In addition, when controlling lamps for the fourth designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, the performance control CPU 120 times the specified 600,000 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until the time reaches 600,000 ms. However, if the time has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 through data 4, the brightness data will again be output to the LED driver in order, starting with data 1. When the time reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. At this time, because the child table does not have a next grandchild table specified, output of brightness data based on the grandchild table first specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will begin. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the clock will not reach 600,000 ms, and if the next extension command is received from the display control unit 123 before the clock reaches 600,000 ms, output of brightness data will begin based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table specified in the newly received extension command.

As shown in the parent table in Figure 129, the maximum lamp control time by a child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and this 10-minute data in the parent table serves as a malfunction countermeasure. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables to control lamps based on performance control commands from the main board 11, but even if a malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the main board 11, lamp control will be performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, preventing different lamps from being controlled one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Furthermore, as shown in the child table in Figure 130, the execution time for lamp control by the last-specified grandchild table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes).The 10-minute data in such a child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again by the first-specified grandchild table of the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table reaches 0, due to the parent table's timer still remaining.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time for lamp control that references the last specified brightness data. This configuration prevents the 10-minute data in the brightness data from causing lamp control to be performed again using the brightness data specified first in the grandchild table when the timer corresponding to the grandchild table reaches 0, due to the child table's timer still remaining. By specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table in this way, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, preventing problems with continuous changes in lamp illumination. Furthermore, specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified last in the child table can more effectively prevent problems with continuous changes in lamp illumination.

[Lamp data table used during non-playing 1]
FIG. 134 shows a lamp data table used when not playing (only the button flashes white and the button flashes red is used during play).

The background normal shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image, and the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using background normal when it receives the extended command: B10E sent in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the normal background image after power is restored (when controlled to normal state), after the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the game state has ended, after the fluctuations in normal state have ended, after the final game fluctuation in the time-saving state has ended, after the jackpot game state has ended (when controlled to normal state), after the demo movie in normal state has ended, and after the menu display in normal state has ended.

The background time-saving shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time-saving background image, and the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the normal background when it receives the extended command: B11D sent in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the time-saving background image after power is restored (if controlled to the time-saving state), after fluctuations in the time-saving state have ended, after the jackpot game state has ended (if controlled to the time-saving state), after the demo movie in the time-saving state has ended, or after the menu display in the time-saving state has ended.

The background probability variation shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the probability variation background image, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the normal background when it receives the extended command: B121 sent in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the probability variation background image after power is restored (if controlled to probability variation state), after the fluctuation in probability variation state has ended, after the jackpot game state has ended (if controlled to probability variation state), after the demo movie in probability variation state has ended, and after the menu display in probability variation state has ended.

The customer waiting demo shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer waiting demo effect. When the conditions for starting the customer waiting demo effect are met and the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: BF01 sent in response to control to display an image corresponding to the customer waiting demo effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the customer waiting demo.

The white button light shown in Figure 134 is the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e, which corresponds to non-play periods excluding periods during which an initialization notification is being issued. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the white button light when it receives the extended command: B001 sent from the display control unit 123 after power is restored, after the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the game state has ended, and after the operation prompt presentation has ended.

The button flashing white shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompt effect, and when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B002 transmitted in conjunction with control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the operation prompt effect of flashing the button lamp 9e white during gameplay, it controls the game effect lamp 9 using the button flashing white.

The red flashing button shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompt effect, and when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B003 transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of an image corresponding to the operation prompt effect of flashing the button lamp 9e red during gameplay, it controls the game effect lamp 9 using the white flashing button.

Incidentally, button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompt presentation, and lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the white button illumination except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompt presentation. Furthermore, since no game effect lamps 9 other than button lamp 9e are specified for the white button illumination, white flashing button, or red flashing button, even when the presentation control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying the white button illumination, white flashing button, or red flashing button, lamp control of game effect lamps 9 other than button lamp 9e will continue based on the previous lamp data table.

The initialization notification shown in Figure 134 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command: BFFF sent in conjunction with the display control unit 123 performing control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, it uses initialization to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9.

The error shown in Figure 134 is the lamp data table for the main lamp 9a corresponding to the error notification, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command: BFF1 sent from the display control unit 123 in response to the occurrence of an error, it uses the error to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, since an error does not specify any game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a, even when the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying an error, it continues to control the lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a based on the previous lamp data table.

[Lamp Data Table: Background Normal]
Figure 135 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: background normal used when the extension command: B10E is received, Figure 136 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: background normal, and Figures 137 and 138 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background normal.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B10E transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of a normal background image, it specifies the normal background parent table based on the extended command: B10E. As shown in FIG. 135, the normal background parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B10E, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the normal background parent table.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP contains the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time, as shown in Figure 136.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (Figure 137) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 137, the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced main lamp 9a. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO is set to a brightness with a blue base, and the main lamp 9a lights up in a way that changes brightness with a blue base.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly controls the lamps using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms have elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000 ms have elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, it controls the lamps based on the lamp data table that is based on the newly received extended command.

As shown in Figures 135 to 138, the background normal parent table has child tables set up that also reference the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacca lamps 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables set up to reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data and other settings set up in execution order to reference. The performance control CPU 120 controls the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacca lamps 9c in the same procedure as above, by referencing the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table referenced by the background normal child table for the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacca lamps 9c also has a blue-based brightness setting, and the lighting mode for the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacca lamps 9c changes brightness with a blue base.

In addition, since the normal background parent table does not have child or grandchild tables set for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Time Reduction]
Figure 139 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: background time reduction used when the extension command: B11D is received, Figure 140 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: background time reduction, and Figures 141 to 142 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background time reduction.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B11D transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of a time-saving background image, it specifies the parent table for the background time-saving based on the extended command B11D. As shown in Figures 139 to 142, the parent table for the background time-saving has child tables set that reference the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables set that they reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data set in execution order to reference. The performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c in the same manner as for normal background control, referencing the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table referenced by the background time reduction child table for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c is set to a green-based brightness, and the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes with a green base.

In addition, since the parent table for background time reduction does not have child or grandchild tables set for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Chance Variation]
Figure 143 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: background probability change used when the extension command: B121 is received, Figure 144 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: background probability change, and Figures 145 to 146 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background probability change.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command B121 transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123's control of displaying a background image for a probability variation, it specifies the parent table for the background probability variation based on the extended command B121. As shown in Figures 143 to 146, the parent table for the background probability variation has child tables set that reference the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables, etc., that they reference. These grandchild tables also have brightness data, etc., set in execution order. The effect control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c in the same manner as for a normal background, referencing the child table specified by the parent table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table referenced by the background probability change child table for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c is set to a purple-based brightness, and the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c also have a lighting pattern in which the brightness changes with a purple base.

In addition, since the parent table for the background probability change does not have a child table or grandchild table set for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white).

[Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo]
Figure 147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo used when the extended command: BF01 is received, Figure 148 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, and Figures 149 to 155 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01 sent when the display control unit performs display control for the customer waiting demo display performance, it specifies the parent table for the customer waiting demo based on the extended command: BF01. As shown in FIG. 147, the parent table for the customer waiting demo is set to perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table for the customer waiting demo.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO contains the grandchild tables and execution times of main lamp 9a in the order of reference, as shown in Figure 148.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is set first in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes white at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and controls the lamps by referencing grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 150 and 151), which is the second grandchild table set in child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white throughout the company name part that makes up the customer waiting demo performance, and the lighting pattern changes in accordance with the movement of the letters in the company name.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 9,500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, and controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the third table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. The common table is a grandchild table that is commonly referenced even when the parent table is different. As a result, the main lamp 9a will be extinguished for the duration of the parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance: Model Introduction 1, Model Introduction 2-1, Model Introduction 3-1, Model Introduction 2-2, Model Introduction 3-1, and Model Introduction 2-3.

The effect control CPU 120 then times 30,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, and controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is the fourth set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table that is also used when displaying the title of a jackpot. As a result, the light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors during the main title part that makes up the customer waiting demo effect.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, and controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is set as the fifth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes white at the start of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is set as the sixth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors over the period of the subtitle 1 part that makes up the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, and performs lamp control by referencing the seventh grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149) in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that makes up the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is set as the eighth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors over the period of the two subtitle parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, and performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the ninth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for 500 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, and performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 155), which is set as the 10th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white during the Attention 1 and Attention 2 parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 4000 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, and performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 171) set as the 11th table in child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for 500 ms.

Then, when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B10E, B11D, or B121) sent when performing display control such as normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 switches to lamp control using the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off until a new extension command is received, and when a new extension command is received, it switches to an illumination mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in Figure 147, the parent table for the customer waiting demo is set to perform lamp control for side lamp 9b for a maximum of 600,000 ms by referencing child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. When the performance control CPU 120 receives extension command: BF01, it performs lamp control for side lamp 9b by referencing child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table for the customer waiting demo.

Child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO contains the grandchild tables and execution times of side lamp 9b in the order of reference, as shown in Figure 148.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is set first in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes white at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 150 and 151), which is the second grandchild table set in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the company name part that makes up the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and the lighting pattern changes in accordance with the movement of the letters in the company name.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 9,500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, and performs lamp control by referencing the third common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 171) set in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, and controls the lamps by referencing the fourth grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03 (Figure 152) set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of Model Introduction 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamps 9b change color in the following order according to the type of character that appears: green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, white.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 counts down 12,500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03, it performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 153), which is the fifth grandchild table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of machine introduction 2-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the light emission state changes in a predetermined pattern.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 counts down 5000 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it controls the lamps by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 154), which is set as the sixth grandchild table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes green for the duration of machine introduction 3-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 1000 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 153), which is the seventh table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of machine introduction 2-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the lighting state changes in a predetermined pattern.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 counts down 5000 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it controls the lamps by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 154), which is set as the eighth grandchild table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes green for the duration of machine introduction 3-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 counts down 1000 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, it controls the lamps by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 153), which is the ninth set in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of machine introduction 2-3, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the lighting state changes in a predetermined pattern.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 5000 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, and performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 171) set as the 10th in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500 ms.

The effect control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, and controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is the 11th set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table that is also used when displaying the title of a jackpot. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes color to a rainbow of colors during the main title part that makes up the customer waiting demo effect.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, and performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is set as the 12th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes white at the start of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 counts down 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is set as the 13th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes color to rainbow colors for the duration of the subtitle 1 part that makes up the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, and performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 149), which is set as the 14th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that makes up the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 172), which is the 15th table set in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes color to a rainbow of colors over the duration of the two subtitle parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 4500 ms, which is the execution time of common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, and performs lamp control by referencing common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 171), which is set as the 16th table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, side lamp 9b remains off for 500 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, and performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 155), which is set as the 17th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up in white during the Attention 1 and Attention 2 parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 4000 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, and performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 171) set as the 18th in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500 ms.

Then, when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) sent when performing display control such as normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 switches to lamp control using the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off until a new extended command is received, and when a new extended command is received, it switches to the lighting mode based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figures 147 to 155, the parent table for the customer waiting demo has child tables set up that also reference the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables, etc. that they reference set up in order of execution. These grandchild tables also have brightness data, etc. that they reference set up in order of execution. The performance control CPU 120 controls the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c in the same procedure as above, by referencing the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

As a result, after the start of the customer waiting demo performance, the movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c flash white for 500 ms at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, remain lit in white for the duration of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and change their light emission pattern in accordance with the movement of the letters in the company name, then turn off for 500 ms, change their light emission color in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white in accordance with the type of character that appears during the model introduction 1 period that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, light up in white for the model introduction 2-1 period that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and change their light emission pattern in a predetermined pattern, flash green for the model introduction 3-1 period that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, light up in white for the model introduction 2-2 period that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and change their light emission pattern in a predetermined pattern, flash green for the model introduction 3-2 period that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, It lights up white for the duration of Model Introduction 2-3, which make up the performance, and the light emission pattern changes in a predetermined pattern, then remains off for 500 ms, changes color to a rainbow color for the duration of the main title part, which makes up the customer waiting demo performance, flashes white at the start of Subtitle 1, which makes up the customer waiting demo performance, changes color to a rainbow color for the duration of Subtitle 1, which makes up the customer waiting demo performance, flashes white at the start of Subtitle 2, which makes up the customer waiting demo performance, changes color to a rainbow color for the duration of Subtitle 2, which makes up the customer waiting demo performance, then remains off for 500 ms, lights up white for the duration of Warning 1 and Warning 2 parts, which make up the customer waiting demo performance, then remains off for 500 ms, and remains off until a new extended command is received, at which point it switches to the light emission pattern based on the received extended command.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it controls the lamps based on the lamp data table: customer waiting demo in accordance with the extended command: BF01, causing the main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c to change in light color and light pattern according to each part of the customer waiting demo performance.

In addition, since the parent table for the customer waiting demo does not have child or grandchild tables set for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white).

In addition, for the Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo, grandchild tables are specified for the company name part, model introduction 1 part, model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, model introduction 2-3, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and warning part for the movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c, so lamp control can be performed so that the movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c emit light in a manner appropriate for each part.

In addition, for the Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo, for the main lamp 9a, grandchild tables are specified for the company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and warning part, while for Model Introduction 2-1, Model Introduction 3-1, Model Introduction 2-2, Model Introduction 3-2, and Model Introduction 2-3 that make up the model introduction part, one grandchild table is specified, thereby reducing the overall amount of data.

In addition, the Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo does not have a grandchild table for button lamp 9e, and for button lamp 9e, lamp control is performed based on one grandchild table from before the customer waiting demo, which reduces the overall amount of data.

Furthermore, for grandchild tables that control the lights to be off or that emit rainbow colors, lamp control is performed using a common table that is also used by other parent tables, reducing the overall amount of data. Grandchild tables that temporarily emit white light can also be controlled using a common table.

[Lamp data table: Button lit white]
Figure 156 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: button white lit, which is used when the extension command: B001 is received, Figure 157 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: button white lit, and Figure 158 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button white lit.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives extended command: B001 from the display control unit 123 after power is restored, after the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the game state has ended, or after the operation prompt effect has ended, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the parent table for the white button illumination based on extended command: B001. As shown in FIG. 156, the parent table for the white button illumination is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for button lamp 9e by referencing child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the effect control CPU 120 receives extended command: B001, it controls the lamp of button lamp 9e by referencing child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the white button illumination.

Child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 157.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (Figure 158) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 158, the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU is set to a brightness that emits white light, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

After child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly controls the lamps using grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms have elapsed, it sets child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B002 or B003) that changes the lighting state of button lamp 9e before 600,000 ms have elapsed after child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, it controls the lamps based on the lamp data table that is based on the newly received extended command.

In addition, since the parent table for the white button light does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacca lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp data table: Button flashing white]
Figure 159 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button flashing white that is used when extended command: B002 is received, Figure 160 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: button flashing white, and Figure 161 is a diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button flashing white.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives extended command: B002, which is transmitted in conjunction with control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to an operation prompt effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, it specifies the parent table for the white flashing button based on extended command: B002. As shown in FIG. 159, the parent table for the white flashing button is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the effect control CPU 120 receives extended command: B002, it controls the button lamp 9e by referencing child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the white flashing button.

Child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 160.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (Figure 161) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 161, the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU is set to a brightness that emits white light and an off state, and the button lamp 9e flashes white.

After child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly controls the lamp using grandchild table: XD_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms have elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B001) that changes the lighting state of button lamp 9e before 600,000 ms have elapsed after child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, it controls the lamp based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command.

In addition, since the parent table for the white flashing button does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacca lamp 9c, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp data table: button flashing red]
Figure 162 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: button flashing red used when extended command: B003 is received, Figure 163 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: button flashing red, and Figure 164 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button flashing red.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives extended command: B003, which is transmitted in conjunction with control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to an operation prompt effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash red during gameplay, it specifies the parent table for the flashing red button based on extended command: B003. As shown in FIG. 162, the parent table for the flashing red button is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the effect control CPU 120 receives extended command: B003, it controls the button lamp 9e by referencing child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the flashing red button.

Child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 163.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (Figure 164) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 164, the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU is set to a brightness that emits red light and an off state, and the button lamp 9e flashes red.

After child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly controls the lamp using grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms have elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) that changes the lighting state of button lamp 9e before 600,000 ms have elapsed after child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, it controls the lamp based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command.

In addition, since the parent table for the red flashing button does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacca lamp 9c, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp Data Table: Initialization Notification]
Figure 165 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: initialization notification used when the extended command: BFFF is received, Figure 166 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: initialization notification, and Figure 167 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: initialization notification.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFFF, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of an image corresponding to the initialization notification, it specifies the parent table for the initialization notification based on the extended command: BFFF. As shown in FIG. 165, the parent table for the initialization notification is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFFF, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table for the initialization notification.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP contains the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time, as shown in Figure 166.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (Figure 167) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 167, the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA is set with the brightness data and execution time of the referenced main lamp 9a. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA is set to a brightness that causes red light to be emitted, and the main lamp 9a lights up red.

After child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly controls the lamps using grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms have elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if an extended command is received before 600,000 ms have elapsed after child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the lamp data table that is based on the newly received extended command.

As shown in Figures 165 to 167, the parent table for initialization notifications has child tables set up that also reference the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, attacca lamps 9c, and button lamps 9e. These child tables also have grandchild tables set up to reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data and other settings set up in execution order. The performance control CPU 120 controls the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, attacca lamps 9c, and button lamps 9e in the same procedure as above, by referencing the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table referenced by the initialization notification child table for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e is also set to a brightness that causes red light to be emitted, and the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e also light up red.

[Lamp Data Table: Error]
Figure 168 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: error used when the extended command: BFF1 is received, Figure 169 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: error, and Figure 170 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: error.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1 sent from the display control unit 123 following the occurrence of an error, it specifies the error parent table based on the extended command: BFF1. As shown in FIG. 168, the error parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP specified by the error parent table.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP contains the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a it references and the execution time, as shown in Figure 169.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR (Figure 170) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 170, the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced main lamp 9a. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR is set to a red brightness and an off state, and the main lamp 9a flashes red.

After child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly controls the lamps using grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms have elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if an extended command is received before 600,000 ms have elapsed after child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the lamp data table that is based on the newly received extended command.

In addition, since the error parent table does not have child or grandchild tables set for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, or button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Common Table]
Common tables are grandchild tables that are also referenced by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in Figures 171 to 175, include common tables (XD___L to _OFF) that turn off the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, common tables (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01) that slowly change the colors of the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e to rainbow colors, and common tables (XD___L to _RAINBOW_02) that quickly change the colors of the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e to rainbow colors.

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, and it is possible to control some of the game effect lamps 9 using the common tables.

By providing a common table that can be referenced from child tables set up in different parent tables to control lamps, data volume can be reduced.

As described above, the present invention provides
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a light emitting means,
The game control means
variably displaying the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns;
The display device can be controlled into a normal state and a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be performed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter,
The performance control means
It is possible to variably display a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variably displayed specific identification information,
It is possible to display a hold indicator corresponding to a variable indication of special identification information that has not yet been started;
A corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed can be displayed in the corresponding display area;
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display can be performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
The variable display of the decoration identification information can be a moving display that moves the decoration identification information, and a pre-operation display that operates the decoration identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed;
variably displaying the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means;
The switching display can be performed in common when the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information,
The display means
In a first period after the game is finished, a background display is displayed,
a demonstration display is displayed during a second period after the first period has ended;
The performance control means
If a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
According to the present invention, when the variable display of a specific identification information begins, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to a corresponding display. During the switching display, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby effectively utilizing the time required for the switching display. Furthermore, because the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, which tends to be monotonous, and the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information can be made more interesting. Furthermore, because a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced. Furthermore, by continuing to execute the notification of a specific error that occurs during gameplay via a lamp during both background display and demonstration display, stable notification of the specific error can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control. Thus, the present invention prevents players from feeling uncomfortable due to unnatural displays of decorative identification information and reserved displays, thereby enhancing interest and enabling optimal customer waiting control. Therefore, the present invention has high marketability.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the first presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, the second presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and the third presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, three or more presentation modes may be executable in a high base state, or only one presentation mode may be executable.

In addition, the above embodiment illustrates a form in which a vertical scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode, a rotating display in the second presentation mode, and a vertical scrolling display in the third presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states may also be a time-saving state, a probability variable state, a small jackpot game state, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to execute variable display than the normal state and have a shorter average variable display period, are a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state, and the special state may be a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variable state (high probability high base state), and an example is given of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the probability variable state at the end of a jackpot game.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is part of the case where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game can be called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled after the end of an advantageous state or in a low-probability state after RAM clearing (a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays without being controlled to an advantageous state can be called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low-probability state can be called time-saving state C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to enter the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can result in winning the time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may be varied depending on the type of variable display result that results in winning the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, while the above embodiment applies to a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention can also be applied to slot machines in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is output to a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded depending on the variable display result output to the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, or assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning, as well as slot machines. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by variably displaying identification information including first identification information and second identification information when a starting condition is met,
In one rendering mode, a plurality of types of background displays including a first background display and a second background display can be switched and displayed;
When switching the background display from the first background display to the second background display, a background fade-out display can be executed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first background display , and a background fade-in display can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second background display,
the region in which the identification information is variably displayed includes at least a first region and a second region;
when starting the variable display of the identification information, starting the variable display of the first identification information in the first area and starting the variable display of the second identification information in the second area;
a first identification information fade-out display can be performed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first identification information in the first area when variable display of the first identification information is started, and a second identification information fade-out display can be performed by gradually increasing the transparency of the second identification information in the second area when variable display of the second identification information is started,
When terminating the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down in the first area, and the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down in the second area;
a first identification information fade-in display can be performed in which the transparency of the first identification information is gradually decreased in the first area when the variable display of the first identification information is slowed down, and a second identification information fade-in display can be performed in which the transparency of the second identification information is gradually decreased in the first area when the variable display of the second identification information is slowed down,
At least one of the first identification information fade-in display and the second identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display can be executed at a common time,
a period during which the first identification information fade-in display is performed and a period during which the second identification information fade-in display is performed are common to each other;
an execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than an execution period of the first identification information fade-in display and an execution period of the second identification information fade-in display;
The background display can be displayed during a first period after the game is completed,
A demonstration display can be displayed during a second period after the first period has ended,
During the first period, a light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
before the display is switched from the background display to the demonstration display, the background display luminance data table is switched to the demonstration display luminance data table to control the light emitting means;
when the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information before the fade-out display of the first identification information and the fade-out display of the second identification information are started;
A gaming machine characterized by: